2002 CR-V Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/ACR0202OM/enu/CR0202OM.pdf2002 CR-V Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

2002 CR-V Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i

A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii

Important Handling Information .............................................................................................................iii

Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................2

Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.

Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................63 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.

Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................127 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................183 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.

Driving ...........................................................................................................................................................197 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.

Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................233 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.

Appearance Care.........................................................................................................................................297 Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your vehicle ever needs body repairs.

Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................307 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.

Technical Information ...............................................................................................................................339 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.

Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................353 A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................357 How to order manuals and other technical literature.

Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

This Owner’s Manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle, and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe CR-V. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

Si prefiere este Manual delPropietario en español,comuníquese con el concesionarioHonda.

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33S9AC00

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Hondadealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique toyour Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2002 Honda CR-V was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

－－

－－

－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

These signal words mean:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety SectionInstructions

Safety Headings

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

Your CR-V has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher groundclearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a highcenter of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wearseat belts.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and thesection on page . Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an

accident.226

198Off-Highway Guidelines

Important Handling Information

iii

Your Vehicle at a Glance

2

PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWWSSWWIITTCCHHEESS

((PP..111144))MMIIRRRROORR CCOONNTTRROOLLSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORRSS

GGAAUUGGEESS ((PP..7722))

((PP..8822))

PPOOWWEERR DDOOOORRLLOOCCKK SSWWIITTCCHH((PP..8888))

((PP..111100))

((PP..9944))

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE

HHEEAATTIINNGG//CCOOOOLLIINNGGCCOONNTTRROOLLSS((PP..112288))

((PP..114444,, 116622))DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK

((PP..118855))HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE((PP..118866))

((PP..6655)) AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM((PP..113388,, 115544))

AA//TT mmooddeell iiss sshhoowwnn..

HHAATTCCHH GGLLAASSSS RREELLEEAASSEEBBUUTTTTOONN

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL DDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE

＊

＊＊

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.:

Your Vehicle at a Glance

3

((PP..220044))SSHHIIFFTT LLEEVVEERR ((AA//TT))

((PP..8811))

TTIILLTT AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT

((PP..111133))MMOOOONNRROOOOFF

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL((PP..117799))


HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS

HHOORRNN

((PP..7766,, 7777))

((PP..8833))PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE((PP..8822))

((PP..8811))

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWWDDEEFFOOGGGGEERR

((PP..7788,, 7799))

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDDWWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS

4

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains your Supple-mental Restraint System. And it tellsyou how to properly restrain infantsand children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.........................................Airbags . 10

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11..........................Head Restraints . 11

..................................Door Locks . 11........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12

............................Protecting Adults . 13.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 15

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 165. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 17....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 20

7. Maintain a Proper Sitting................................Position . 20

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 21...Additional Safety Precautions . 22

........................Protecting Children . 24All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 24Children Should Sit in the Back

...........................................Seat . 25The Passenger’s Front Airbag

Poses Serious Risks to..............................Children . 25

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 28

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 28

...Additional Safety Precautions . 28General Guidelines for Using

...............................Child Seats . 29.......................Protecting Infants . 34

.........Protecting Small Children . 38.......Protecting Larger Children . 42

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 46

.............................Using LATCH . 48Additional Information About Your

.................................Seat Belts . 50..Seat Belt System Components . 50

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 50Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 52...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 53

Additional Information About Your.....................................Airbags . 54

........................SRS Components . 54How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 54...How Your Side Airbags Work . 56

How the SRS Indicator Light.......................................Works . 57

How the Side Airbag Cutoff...........Indicator Light Works . 58

.............................Airbag Service . 59...Additional Safety Precautions . 59

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 60...................................Safety Labels . 61

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety 5

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed the greater therisk, but serious accidents can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual. (See page

.)

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance. (See page .)

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal collision.So even though your vehicle isequipped with airbags, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear your seat belts, and wear themproperly. (See page .)

Children are safest when they areproperly restrained in the back seat,not the front seat. A child who is toosmall for a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in a child safety seat. (Seepage .)

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

17238

24

10


Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Restrain All Children

Don’t Drink and Drive

6

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones that are designed tocrumple and absorb energy during acrash; a collapsible steering column;and seat belt tensioners thatautomatically tighten the front seatbelts in the event of a crash.

CONTINUED


Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

7

((44))

((77))

((55))

((99))

((11))

((88)) ((66)) ((22))

((33))((1100))

((22))

((11)) SSaaffeettyy CCaaggee((22)) CCrruusshh ZZoonneess((33)) SSeeaattss && SSeeaatt--BBaacckkss((44)) HHeeaadd RReessttrraaiinnttss((55)) CCoollllaappssiibbllee SStteeeerriinngg CCoolluummnn((66)) SSeeaatt BBeellttss((77)) FFrroonntt AAiirrbbaaggss((88)) SSiiddee AAiirrbbaaggss

((UU..SS.. EEXX,, CCaannaaddiiaann EEXX aanndd EEXX--LL))((99)) FFrroonntt SSeeaatt BBeelltt TTeennssiioonneerrss((1100)) DDoooorr LLoocckkss

These safety features are designedto reduce the severity of injuries in acrash. However, you and yourpassengers can’t take full advantageof these safety features unless youremain sitting in a proper positionand

In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

For your safety, and the safety ofyour passengers, your vehicle isequipped with seat belts in all seatingpositions.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.


Seat Belts

always wear your seat beltsproperly.

Why Wear Seat Belts


8

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers. In a rollover crash, anunbelted person is more likely todie than a person wearing a seatbelt.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.



What you should do:

9

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force andspeed. So while airbags help savelives, they can cause minor injuries,or more serious or even fatalinjuries if occupants are notproperly restrained or sittingproperly.

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Your vehicle has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision.

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact.

Only on models equipped with sideairbags

Airbags


What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, rollovers, or minorfrontal or side collisions.

Airbags do not replace seat belts.


10

Your vehicle’s seats are designed tokeep you in a comfortable, uprightposition so you can take fulladvantage of the protection offeredby seat belts and the energyabsorbing materials in the seats.

Head restraints can help protect youfrom whiplash and other injuries. Formaximum protection, the back ofyour head should rest against thecenter of the head restraint.

Reclining a seat-back too far reducesthe seat belt’s effectiveness andincreases the chance that the seat’soccupant will slide under the seatbelt in a crash and be seriouslyinjured.

Move the frontseats as far back as possible, andkeep adjustable seat-backs in anupright position whenever thevehicle is moving.

Keeping your doors locked reducesthe chance of being thrown out ofthe vehicle during a crash. It alsohelps prevent occupants fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out, and outsiders fromunexpectedly opening your doors.

How you adjust your seats and seat-backs can also affect your safety. Forexample, sitting too close to thesteering wheel or dashboardincreases the risk of you or yourpassenger being injured by strikingthe inside of the vehicle, or by aninflating airbag.

Seats & Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Door LocksWhat you should do:



To make sure you and yourpassengers get the maximumprotection from your vehicle’s safetyfeatures, check the following eachtime before you drive away:

All adults, and children who haveoutgrown child safety seats, arewearing their seat belts andwearing them properly (see page

).

Any infant or small child isproperly restrained in a child seatin the back seat (see page ).

Front seat occupants are sittingupright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel anddashboard (see page ).

Seat-backs are upright (see page).

Head restraints are properlyadjusted (see page ).

All doors and the tailgate areclosed and locked (see page ).

All cargo is properly stored orsecured (see page ).

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

17

24

13

15

16

13

193

Pre-Drive Safety Checklist


Driver and Passenger Safety12

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver and other adultoccupants.

These instructions also apply tochildren who have outgrown childseats and are large enough to wearlap/shoulder belts. (See page forimportant additional guidelines onhow to properly protect largerchildren.)

Any driver who sits too close to thesteering wheel is at risk of beingseriously injured or killed by strikingthe steering wheel, or from beingstruck by an inflating airbag during acrash.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors andtailgate (including the hatch glass)are closed and locked.

Your vehicle has a doormonitor light on the

instrument panel to indicate whenany door is not tightly closed.

Your vehicle also has atailgate and hatch glass

open indicator light on theinstrument panel to indicate whenthe tailgate or the hatch glass is nottightly closed.

For safety, locking the doors reducesthe chance that a passenger,especially a child, will open a doorwhile the vehicle is moving andaccidentally fall out. It also reducesthe chance of someone being thrownout of the vehicle during a crash.

For security, locked doors canprevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door whenyou come to a stop.

See page for how to lock thedoors.

42

88

CONTINUED

Introduction

Close and Lock the Doors

Adjust the Front Seats

1.

2.

Protecting Adults


See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

Most shorter drivers can get farenough away from the steeringwheel and still reach the pedals.However, if you are concerned aboutsitting too close, we recommend thatyou investigate whether some typeof adaptive equipment may help.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversadjust the seat so the center of thechest is at least 10 inches (25 cm)away from the center of the steeringwheel. Also make sure your frontseat passenger moves the seat as farto the rear as possible.

To reduce the chance of injury, wearyour seat belt properly, sit uprightwith your back against the seat, andmove the seat away from thesteering wheel to the farthestdistance that allows you to maintainfull control of the vehicle.

97

Protecting Adults


Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

See page for how to adjust seat-backs.

A front passenger should also adjustthe seat-back to an upright position,but as far from the dashboard aspossible. A passenger who sits tooclose to the dashboard could beinjured if the front airbag inflates.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel. If yousit too close to the steering wheel,you could be injured if the frontairbag inflates.

97

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

Protecting Adults


Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position and sit wellback in the seat.

Before driving, make sure everyonewith an adjustable head restraint hasproperly positioned the headrestraint. The restraint should bepositioned so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint. A tallerperson should adjust the restraint ashigh as possible.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

99


Protecting Adults

Adjust the Head Restraints4.

16

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

CONTINUED

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack from theshoulder part, then check that thebelt rests across the center of yourchest and over your shoulder. Thisspreads the forces of a crash overthe strongest bones in your upperbody.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

In the rear center seating position,be sure the detachable anchor islatched securely (see page ).108


Protecting Adults

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

17

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

To adjust the height of a front seatbelt anchor, squeeze the two releasebuttons and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).


Protecting Adults

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

18

RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONNSS

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Anyone using a seat belt that isnot working properly can beseriously injured or killed. Have yourHonda dealer check the belt as soonas possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsystem and how to take care of yourbelts.

50


Protecting Adults

No one shouldsit in a seat with an inoperative seatbelt.

19

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face.

Pointing the steering wheel towardyour chest provides optimalprotection from the airbag.

See page for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured bystriking interior parts of the vehicle,or by being struck by an inflatingfront airbag. Being struck by aninflating side airbag can result inpossibly serious injuries.

83


Protecting Adults

Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6. 7.

20

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Pregnant women should also situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard. This will reduce the riskof injuries to both the mother andher unborn child that can be causedby a crash or an inflating airbag.

Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

Because protecting the mother is thebest way to protect her unborn child,a pregnant woman should alwayswear a seat belt whenever she drivesor rides in a vehicle.

Remember to keep the lap portion ofthe belt as low as possible acrossyour hips.

Remember, to get the bestprotection from your vehicle’sairbags and other safety features,you must sit properly and wear yourseat belt properly.


Protecting Adults

Advice for Pregnant Women

21

All passengersmust sit in locked, upright seatsand be properly restrained by seatbelts.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canseverely compromise theprotective capability of the seatbelt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Protecting Adults


Additional Safety PrecautionsNever let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

22

If yourhands or arms are close to theairbag cover in the center of thesteering wheel or on top of thedashboard, they could be injured ifthe front airbags inflate.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thevehicle and hurt someone.

Protecting Adults


Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

On models with side airbags, donot attach hard objects on or neara front door.

23

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many parents and otheradults may not know how toprotect young passengers. (See page

.)

(See page.)

So if you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a grandchild orother children in your vehicle, besure to read this section.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be restrainedwhenever they ride in a vehicle.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

29

42

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Any child who is too small to wear aseat belt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat.

A larger child should always berestrained with a seat belt.

Protecting Children


Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt.

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it inflates with tremendousspeed.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat, not the front seat. TheNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

In the back seat, children are lesslikely to be injured by striking hardinterior parts during a collision orhard braking. Also, children cannotbe injured by an inflating airbagwhen they ride in the back.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward into thedashboard and crush the child.

During acrash, the belt could press deepinto the child and cause veryserious injuries.

If you are wearing a seat belt, thechild can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour vehicle crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a600-lb (275 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold on.

CONTINUED

The Passenger’s Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks to Children

Children Should Sit in the BackSeat

Additional Precautions to ParentsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand an infant or child.

Protecting Children


Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, properly restrained with a seatbelt. (See page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

42


Protecting Children

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Small Children Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

26

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin the back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

To remind you of the front airbaghazards, your vehicle has warninglabels on the driver’s and frontpassenger’s visors. Please read andfollow the instructions on theselabels.


Protecting Children

U.S. Models Canadian Models

27

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Your vehicle has three seatingpositions in the back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.

If you ever have to carry more thanthree children in your vehicle:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear a seat beltproperly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

Usingthis feature will prevent childrenfrom playing with the windows,which could expose them tohazards or distract the driver (seepage ).

Using this feature willprevent children from opening thedoors and accidentally falling out(see page ).

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards fromthe passenger’s front airbag, andpaying close attention to a childdistracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, placingboth of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

42

13

20

17

93

110


Protecting Children

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Additional Safety Precautions

Use the main power windowswitch to prevent children fromopening the rear windows.

Use childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors.

28

CONTINUED

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Andchildren left alone with the key inthe ignition can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

The following pages give generalguidelines for selecting and installingchild seats for infants and smallchildren.

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside thevehicle. Teach your children not toplay in or around vehicles.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignition,and open the tailgate or hatchglass, which can lead to accidentalinjury or death.


Protecting Children

Do not leave children alone in yourvehicle.

Lock all doors and the tailgatewhen your vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

General Guidelines for UsingChild Seats

29

To provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

The child seat shouldmeet Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 (CMVSS 213). Lookfor the manufacturer’s statementof compliance on the box and seat.

Children up to about oneyear old should be restrained in arear-facing, reclining child seat. Onlya rear-facing seat provides theproper support to protect an infant’shead, neck, and back. See page

for additional information onprotecting infants.

A child who is toolarge for a rear-facing child seat, andwho can sit up without support,should be restrained in a forward-facing child seat. See page foradditional information on protectingsmall children.34

38

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet safetystandards.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Infants: Small Children:2.

1.


Protecting Children

30

CONTINUED

Due to variations in the design ofchild seats, vehicle seats, and seatbelts, all child seats will not fit allvehicle seating positions.

However, Honda is confident thatone or more child seat models can fitand be properly installed in allrecommended seating positions inyour vehicle.

Before purchasing a child seat, werecommend that parents test thechild seat in the specific vehicleseating position (or positions) wherethey intend to use the seat. If apreviously purchased child seat doesnot fit, you may need to buy adifferent one that will fit.

Your vehicle has lower anchorsinstalled for use with LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren) - compatible child seats.For more information, see page .48

Protecting Children


The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

3.

31

If a small child must ride in thefront, follow the instructionsprovided in this section.

This page briefly summarizesHonda’s recommendations on whereto place rear-facing and forward-facing child seats in your vehicle.

The passenger’s front airbaginflates with enough force to killor seriously injure an infant in arear-facing child seat.

A small child in a forward-facingchild seat is also at risk. If thevehicle seat is too far forward,or the child’s head is thrownforward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

Never in the front seat, dueto the front airbag hazard.

Not recommended,due to the front airbag hazard. If asmall child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position and secure aforward-facing child seat with theseat belt (see page ).

Recommended positions.Properly secure a rear-facing childseat (see page ).

Recommendedpositions. Properly secure aforward-facing child seat (seepage ).

39

35

39

Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s SeatInfants:

Small children:

Back SeatsInfants:

Small children:

Airbags Pose SeriousRisks to Children

Protecting Children


After selecting a proper child seat,and a good position to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be thrown out of the seat in acrash and be seriously injured.

To provide security during normaldriving maneuvers as well as duringa collision, we recommend thatparents secure a child seat as firmlyas possible.

When you are not using a child seat,either remove it and store it in a safeplace, or make sure it is properlysecured. An unsecured child seat canbe thrown around the vehicle duringa crash or sudden stop and injuresomeone.

However, a child seat does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehiclesor seating positions, it may bedifficult to install a child seat so thatit does not move at all. Some side-to-side or back-and-forth movement canbe expected and should not reducethe child seat’s effectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly securedin the desired seating position.

All child seats aredesigned to be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. Some child seatscan be secured to the vehicle’sLATCH anchorage system instead.A child whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash. See pages

, and for instructions onhow to properly secure child seatsin this vehicle.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

483935

Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.

Storing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

1.

2.

3.

Protecting Children


Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back. Infants up to aboutone year of age must be restrained ina rear-facing child seat.

We recommend that an infant berestrained in a rear-facing child seatuntil the infant reaches the seatmaker’s weight or height limit and isable to sit up without support.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

In this vehicle, a rear-facing childseat can be placed in any seatingposition in the back, but not in thefront seat.

If the passenger’sfront airbag inflates, it can hit theback of the child seat with enoughforce to kill or seriously injure aninfant. If an infant must be closelywatched, we recommend thatanother adult sit in the back seatwith the baby.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Protecting Children


Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

With the child seat in the desiredback seating position, route thebelt through the child seataccording to the seat maker’sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backseats have a locking mechanism thatmust be activated to secure a childseat.

The following pages provideinstructions and tips on how tosecure a rear-facing child seat withthis type of seat belt.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front-seat passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended (see page ). Or itmay prevent them from locking theseat-back in the desired uprightposition (see page ).

In either case, we recommend thatyou place the child seat directlybehind the front passenger seat,move the front seat as far forward asneeded, and leave it unoccupied. Oryou may wish to get a smaller childseat that allows you to safely carry afront passenger.

If you have a child seat designed tobe attached to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .

Before installing a child seat in thecenter seating position of the rearseat, make sure the seat beltdetachable anchor is securelylatched (see page ).

13

15

1.

2.48

108

CONTINUED

Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children


To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat, whilepulling up on the belt.

3.

4.

5. 6.

Protecting Children


To achieve the desired recliningangle, it may help to put a rolled uptowel under the toe of the child seat,as shown.

For proper protection, an infant mustride in a reclined, or semi-reclinedposition. To determine the properreclining angle, check with the baby’sdoctor or follow the seat maker’srecommendations.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

Rear-Facing Child Seat InstallationTips

Protecting Children


A child who can sit up withoutsupport, and who fits within the childseat maker’s weight and heightlimits, should be restrained in aforward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

In this vehicle, the best place toinstall a forward-facing child seat isin one of the seating positions in theback seat.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to causevery serious or fatal injuries. If asmall child must be closely watched,we recommend that another adult sitin the back seat with the child.

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Protecting Children


With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backand front passenger seating positionshave a locking mechanism that mustbe activated to secure a child seat.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure aforward-facing child seat with thistype of seat belt.

If you have a child seat designed tobe attached to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle, andthat the child is properly strapped inthe seat.

Before installing a child seat in thecenter seating position of the rearseat, make sure the seat beltdetachable anchor is securelylatched (see page ).

482.

1.

108

CONTINUED

Protecting Children


Child Seat Installation

39

Improperly placing a forward-facing child seat in the frontseat can result in serious injuryor death if the front airbagsinflate.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible and properly restrainthe child.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure. Itmay help to put weight on thechild seat, or push on the back ofthe seat, while pulling up on thebelt.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

3.

4.

5.

Protecting Children


To deactivate the lockingmechanism in order to remove achild seat, unlatch the buckle,unroute the seat belt, and let the beltfully retract.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

6.

Protecting Children


When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in the back seat andwear a lap/shoulder belt.

If a child is too short for the shoulderpart of the belt to properly fit, werecommend that the child use abooster seat until the child is tallenough to use the seat belt without abooster.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in the front seat.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt. Follow theinstructions on page . Then checkhow the belt fits.

17

Protecting Larger Children Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Children


Allowing a larger child to sitimproperly in the front seat canresult in injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must sit in front,make sure the child moves theseat as far back as possibleand wears the seat belt properly.

This could result inserious neck injuries during a crash.

If a child needs a booster seat, werecommend choosing a style thatallows the child to use the lap/shoulder belt directly, without ashield, as shown.

Whichever style you select, followthe booster seat maker’s instructions.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt, severelycompromise the protective capabilityof the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

If the shoulder part of the belt restsover the child’s collarbone andagainst the center of the chest, asshown, the child is large enough towear the seat belt.

However, if the belt touches orcrosses the child’s neck, the childneeds to use a booster seat.

CONTINUED

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Using a Booster Seat

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Protecting Children


A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of the ears areeven with the top of the seat-back. Achild of this height should be tallenough to use the lap/shoulder beltwithout a booster.

The back seat is the safest place fora child of any age or size.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

In addition, the passenger’s frontairbag poses serious risks to children.If the seat is too far forward, or thechild’s head is thrown forwardduring a collision, or the child isunrestrained or out of position, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

The side airbag also poses risks. Ifany part of a larger child’s body is inthe path of a deploying airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront, there are other importantfactors you should consider.

When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front

Protecting Children


If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manualand make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit over the hips, chest, andshoulder (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,the child should not sit in the front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

17 42

Physical Size

Maturity

Protecting Children


Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable. (Tethers are required inCanada.)

Your vehicle has three tetheranchorage points on the ceiling nearthe tailgate opening for securing atether-style child seat to the vehicle.

Remove the head restraint whereyou want to place the child seat.

You can remove the head restraint ineach outside position by pressing therelease button. The head restraint inthe center position can be removedby pulling it up (see page ).

The tether anchorage points arelocated under plastic covers. Selectthe anchorage point you want to use,and remove the cover with a smallflat-tipped screwdriver or fingernailfile.

99

Using Child Seats with Tethers

Protecting Children


CCOOVVEERR AANNCCHHOORRAAGGEE PPOOIINNTT

Make sure the removed headrestraints are secured in the cargoarea. Reinstall the head restraintswhen the child seat is removed.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point as shown inthe illustration, then tighten thestrap according to the child seatmaker’s instructions. Make sure thestrap is not twisted.


Protecting Children

47

Put the child seat in the rear leftor right vehicle seat and attach thechild seat to the lower anchorsaccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) at the outerrear seats. The lower anchors arelocated between the seat-back andseat bottom and are to be used onlywith a child seat designed for usewith LATCH.

The exact location of each loweranchor is marked with a small circleabove the lower anchor point.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Store the seat belt buckle in thepocket in the seat cushion andmove the center seat belt awayfrom the lower anchors.

Make sure there are no foreignobjects around the anchors.Foreign objects could get in theway of a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

1.

2.

3.

Using LATCH

Protecting Children


RRiiggiidd ttyyppee

MMAARRKKSS

LLOOWWEERR AANNCCHHOORRSS

Follow the child seat maker’sinstructions for any additionaladvice on adjusting or tighteningthe fit.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point and tightenthe strap according to the childseat maker’s instructions. Makesure the strap is not twisted.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers.

Remove the head restraint (seepage ).

Make sure the removed headrestraints are secured in the cargoarea. Reinstall the head restraintswhen the child seat is removed.

4. 5. 6.

7.

99

Protecting Children


FFlleexxiibbllee ttyyppee

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched.

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle.Guide the belt across your body tothe door pillar. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your belts.If the driver’s seat belt is notfastened before the ignition is turnedON (II), the light will come on and abeeper will also sound. The beeperwill stop after a few seconds, but thelight will stay on until the driver’sseat belt is fastened.

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts


The seat belts in all seating positionsexcept the driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat. (Seepages and for instructions onhow to secure child seats with thistype of seat belt.)

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

See page for instructions on howto wear the lap/shoulder beltproperly.

The lap/shoulder belt in the centerseating position on the rear seat isequipped with a detachable anchorthat has two parts: a small latch plateand an anchor buckle.

The detachable anchor shouldnormaly be latched whenever theseat-backs are in an upright position.For more information about thedetachable anchor (see page ).

35 39

17

108



DDEETTAACCHHAABBLLEE AANNCCHHOORR

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions.The tensioners are independent ofthe airbag system, so they can beactivated during a collision thatmight not cause the airbags todeploy. In this case, the airbagswould not be needed but theadditional seat belt tension can behelpful.

The tensioners will be activated in acollision severe enough to cause thefront airbags to inflate.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalway.

The SRS indicator light willcome on if there is a

problem with your automatic seatbelt tensioners (see page ).57



Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

52

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed.

Automatic seat belt tensioners thatdeployed during a crash must bereplaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthat the lap/shoulder belts retracteasily. Any belt not in good conditionor not working properly will notprovide good protection and shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

Honda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts. Honda will repair orreplace any seat belt component thatfails to function properly duringnormal use. Please see your

booklet fordetails.

302

HondaWarranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance

U.S. Models



Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Your Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) includes:

An indicator light on theinstrument panel that alerts you toa possible problem with thesystem (see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Two front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

Automatic seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe frontalcollision.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, the sensorswill detect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflate thefront airbags and activate theautomatic seat belt tensioners.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, and driver andpassenger seat belt use when theignition is ON (II).

52

57

SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work

Additional Information About Your Airbags


The total time for inflation anddeflation is approximately one-tenthof a second, so fast that mostoccupants are not aware that theairbags deployed until they see themlying in their laps.

During a frontal crash, your seatbelts help restrain your lower bodyand torso. Your airbag provides acushion to help restrain and protectyour head and chest.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

For additional information on howyour airbags work, ask your dealerfor a copy of the booklet titled

For additional information on howyour airbags work, see the booklettitled

that came with yourowner’s manual.

Since both airbags use the samesensors, both airbags normallyinflate at the same time. However, itis possible for only one airbag toinflate.

This can occur when the severity ofa collision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

SRS:What You Need to Know About Airbags.

SRS: What You Need to KnowAbout Airbags

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners



If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, the sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Your vehicle is equipped with sideairbags for the driver and a frontseat passenger. The airbags arestored in the outer edges of the frontseat-backs, and both are marked‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’

Standard on EX model in the U.S., andEX and EX-L models in Canada



How Your Side Airbags Work

56

If the light comes on at any othertime, or does not come on at all, youshould have the system checked byyour dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator light does notcome on after you turn the ignitionON (II).

If the light stays on after theengine starts.

If the light comes on or flashes onand off while you drive.

The SRS indicator lightalerts you to a potential

problem with your front airbags andautomatic seat belt tensioners.

On models with side airbags, thislight will also alert you to a potentialproblem with your side airbags orpassenger’s side airbag automaticcutoff system (see page ).

When you turn the ignition ON (II),this indicator will light briefly thengo out. This tells you that the systemis working properly.

If you see any of these indications,your front or side airbags may notdeploy, your passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system may notwork properly, or your seat belttensioners may not work when youneed them. See your Honda dealeras soon as possible.

58

How the SRS Indicator LightWorks



Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags, cutoffsystem, or tensioners do notwork properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS light alerts you to apotential problem.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

When you turn the ignition ON (II),the indicator should light briefly andgo out (see page ). If it doesn’tlight, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

If a small-statured adult leanssideways, or larger adult slouchesand leans sideways into thedeployment path of the side airbag,the system may also shut off the sideairbag.

If the side airbag cutoff indicatorlight comes on, you should have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the deploymentpath of the side airbag, the systemwill turn the airbag back on and thelight will go out.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your vehicle hasan automatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in the front, thissystem is designed to shut off theside airbag if a child leans sidewaysand the child’s head is in the sideairbag deployment path.

If does not mean there is a problemwith your side airbags. It means thatthe side airbag cutoff system hasactivated to prevent the side airbagfrom deploying.

This light alerts you thatthe passenger’s side airbag

has been automatically shut off. 67




How the Side Airbag CutoffIndicator Light Works

58

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

See page for further informationand precautions relating to yourairbags.

If rain or spilled watersoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag systemfrom working properly.

Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during acollision.

Anyairbag that has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit, automatic seat belttensioners, and other related parts.Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by a Honda dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Your front and side airbag systems(if equipped) are virtuallymaintenance-free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Take your vehicle toan authorized Honda dealer assoon as possible. If you ignore thisindication, the airbags might notinflate when you need them.

192

Airbag Service Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto water.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting aHonda dealer.

Your airbags ever inflate.

The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem.



Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged the under-side.

With the tailgate/hatch glass open,air flow can pull exhaust gas intoyour vehicle’s interior and create ahazardous condition. If you mustdrive with the tailgate/hatch glassopen, open all the windows and setthe heating and cooling system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehicle,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

Select the Fresh Air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard


Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your Honda dealerfor a replacement.

CONTINUED

U.S. models only

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels


SUN VISOR

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

On models without side airbags

On models with side airbags

Safety Labels


HOOD

RADIATOR CAP

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Honda. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 64...............................Indicator Lights . 65

.............................................Gauges . 72...............................Speedometer . 72

.................................Tachometer . 72..............Odometer/Trip Meter . 73

Outside Temperature..................................Indicator . 73..................................Fuel Gauge . 74

...................Temperature Gauge . 74Controls Near the Steering

.......................................Wheel . 75...................................Headlights . 76

............Daytime Running Lights . 77....Instrument Panel Brightness . 77

................................Turn Signals . 77.....................Windshield Wipers . 78

..................Windshield Washers . 79Rear Window Wiper and

.....................................Washer . 80..........................Hazard Warning . 81

.............Rear Window Defogger . 81.............................Parking Brake . 82

......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 83...............................Keys and Locks . 84

..............................................Keys . 84....................Immobilizer System . 85

............................Ignition Switch . 86......................Power Door Locks . 88

...................Remote Transmitter . 89..............Childproof Door Locks . 93

........................................Tailgate . 93....................................Glove Box . 96

.................................................Seats . 97.............Front Seat Adjustments . 97

Driver’s Seat Height..............................Adjustment . 98

...................Front Seat Armrests . 98..........................Head Restraints . 99

............Rear Seat Adjustments . 100....................Rear Seat Armrest . 101

........Reclining the Front Seats . 102.............Folding the Rear Seats . 104

...................Detachable Anchor . 108..................................Seat Heaters . 109

............................Power Windows . 110.......................................Moonroof . 113

...........................................Mirrors . 114..Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 114

..................................Center Table . 115.........................Beverage Holders . 116

.................................Built-in Table . 117...............................Center Pocket . 119

...................................Storage Box . 119.............................Driver’s Pocket . 120

.......................................Coin Tray . 120........................Sunglasses Holder . 121

............Accessory Power Sockets . 122........................Dashboard Pocket . 123

...............................Interior Lights . 124..............................Ceiling Light . 124

...................................Spotlights . 124......................Cargo Area Light . 125

................Ignition Switch Light . 125

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 63

Control Locations

Instruments and Controls64

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEEHHAANNDDLLEE((PP..118866))

((PP..118855))HHEEAATTIINNGG//CCOOOOLLIINNGG CCOONNTTRROOLLSS((PP..112288))AA//TT mmooddeell iiss sshhoowwnn..

HHAATTCCHH GGLLAASSSSRREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN

((PP..8822))PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE

PPOOWWEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKK SSWWIITTCCHH((PP..8888))

((PP..9944))

PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWWSSWWIITTCCHHEESS((PP..111100))

MMIIRRRROORR CCOONNTTRROOLLSS ((PP..111144))

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL DDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE

((PP..113388,, 115544))AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM

DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK((PP..114444,, 116622))

＊

＊＊

＊＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Indicator Lights


CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLLIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP..6666))

((PP..7700))

((PP..6699))((PP..6677))

((PP..6677))

((PP..6699))

((PP..6699))

HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

DDOOOORR--OOPPEENNIINNDDIICCAATTOORR((PP..7700))

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE AANNDD BBRRAAKKEESSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSEEAATT BBEELLTTRREEMMIINNDDEERR LLIIGGHHTT

((PP..7700))

MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEERREEQQUUIIRREEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

LLOOWW FFUUEELLIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSIIDDEE AAIIRRBBAAGG CCUUTTOOFFFFIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTAAIILLGGAATTEE AANNDD HHAATTCCHH GGLLAASSSS OOPPEENN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP..6688))AANNTTII--LLOOCCKK BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR((PP..6666,, 332255))

IIMMMMOOBBIILLIIZZEERRSSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR((PP..6688))

MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONNIINNDDIICCAATTOORRLLAAMMPP((PP..332277))

CCHHAARRGGIINNGGSSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR((PP..6666,, 332266))

((PP..6677))

See page .

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

This light has two functions:

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch ON (II). Itis a reminder to check the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake not fully released candamage the brakes and tires.

If the indicator remains lit afteryou have fully released theparking brake while the engine isrunning, or if it comes on whiledriving, it can indicate a problemin the brake system. For completeinformation, see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this light flashes or stays on whenthe engine is running. For completeinformation, see page .

If this light comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For completeinformation, see page .

2.

1.

329

327

325

326

Indicator Lights


Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Parking Brake andBrake SystemIndicator

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

66

U.S. Canada

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For complete information, see page

.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags or automatic seatbelt tensioners. On models equippedwith side airbags, this light will alsoalert you to a potential problem withyour side airbags or passenger’s sideairbag automatic cutoff system. Forcomplete information, see page .

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to you and your passengersto protect yourselves by fasteningthe seat belts. A beeper also soundsif you have not fastened your seatbelt.

If you do not fasten your seat belt,the beeper will stop after a fewseconds but the light stays on untilyou do. Both the light and the beeperstay off if you fasten your seat beltbefore turning on the ignition.

58

57


Indicator Lights


Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Side Airbag CutoffIndicator

Seat Belt Reminder Light

67

Only on models equipped with ABS (seepage )212This light normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If this light comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe ABS. If this happens, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itchecked. With the light on, yourvehicle still has normal brakingability but no anti-lock. For completeinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

The left or right turn signal lightblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the light does not blink orblinks rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signalling.

When you turn on the HazardWarning switch, both turn signallights blink. All turn signals on theoutside of the vehicle should flash.

214

85 288

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Turn Signal and Hazard WarningIndicators

Indicator Lights


CanadaU.S.

Canadian models only Canadian models onlyThis indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) withthe headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

This light comes on with the highbeam headlights. See page forinformation on the headlightcontrols.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This lights when you set the cruisecontrol. See page for informationon operating the cruise control.

This light comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

This light comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this light come on(see page ).

77

76

258

179

‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Indicator Lights


－

Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)and 10,000 miles (16,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

This light comes on if the tailgate orthe hatch glass is not closed tightly.

This light comes on if any door is notclosed tightly.

For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II).

Refer to the Maintenance Schedulesfor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on pages .

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in for sched-uled maintenance.

238 242

Indicator Lights

Maintenance RequiredIndicator

Tailgate and Hatch GlassOpen Indicator

Door-open Indicator


Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourHonda dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

Turn off the engine.

Press and hold the select/resetbutton in the instrument panel,then turn the ignition switch ON(II).

Hold the button until the indicatorresets (approximately tenseconds).

1.

2.

3.

Indicator Lights


U.S. Models

Canadian Models

This shows your speed in miles perhour (mph). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in kilometersper hour (km/h).

This shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in miles perhour (mph).

The tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

Gauges


Speedometer

Tachometer

72

TTAACCHHOOMMEETTEERR SSPPEEEEDDOOMMEETTEERR FFUUEELL GGAAUUGGEE

OODDOOMMEETTEERR//TTRRIIPP MMEETTEERR

SSEELLEECCTT//RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNTTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE GGAAUUGGEE

CONTINUED

The odometer shows the total dis-tance your vehicle has been driven.It measures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

The trip meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it. Thereare two trip meters: Trip A and TripB. Switch between these displaysand the odometer by pressing theSelect/Reset button repeatedly.Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the Select/Resetbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0’’.

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Centigrade.

Canadian models only


Gauges

Odometer/Trip Meter Outside Temperature Indicator

73

OOUUTTSSIIDDEE TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to theupper white zone. If it reaches thered (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

The temperature sensor is located inthe front bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the road sur-face, engine heat, and the exhaustfrom the surrounding traffic. Thiscan cause the temperature readingnot to be correct when your speed isunder 19 mph (30 km/h).

This shows how much fuel you have.It is most accurate when the vehicleis on level ground. It may showslightly more or less than the actualamount when you are driving oncurvy or hilly roads.

The needle returns to the bottomafter you turn off the ignition. Thegauge shows the fuel level readingimmediately after you turn theignition switch back ON (II).

When the outside temperature goesdown below 37°F (3°C) the firsttime, the temperature reading blinksabout ten times to show you theoutside temperature is low. In certainweather conditions, temperaturereadings near freezing 32°F (0°C)could mean that ice is forming on theroad surface.

323

Temperature GaugeFuel Gauge

Gauges


Avoid driving with an extremely lowfuel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

＊

＊＊

The two levers on the steeringcolumn contain controls for drivingfeatures you use most often. The leftlever controls the turn signals,headlights, and high beams. Theright lever controls the windshieldwashers and wipers.

The hazard warning lights switch ison the dashboard between thecenter air vents.

The tilt adjustment lever on theunderside of the steering columnallows you to tilt the steering wheel.

The controls under the left air ventare for the moonroof and the cruisecontrol.

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.:

Controls Near the Steering Wheel



((PP..7766,, 7777))

MMOOOONNRROOOOFF((PP..111133))

((PP..8811))

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE((PP..8822))

((PP..117799))CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL

TTIILLTT AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT((PP..8833))

HHOORRNN

HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGGLLIIGGHHTTSS

SSHHIIFFTT LLEEVVEERR ((AA//TT))

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWWDDEEFFOOGGGGEERR

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS((PP..220044))

((PP..8811))WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD WWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS((PP..7788,, 7799))

To change from low beams to highbeams, push the turn signal leverforward until you hear a click. Theblue high beam indicator will light(see page ). To return to lowbeams, pull the turn signal leverback.

If you leave the lights on with theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0), you will hear areminder tone when you open thedriver’s door.

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever back lightly, thenrelease it. The high beams will comeon and go off. The high beams willstay on for as long as you hold thelever back, no matter what positionthe headlight switch is in.

The rotating switch on the left levercontrols the lights. Turning thisswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate light.Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

69

Headlights



Canadian models onlyWith the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

Turn the knob on the left side of theinstrument panel to adjust thebrightness of the instrument panellights.

Signal a turn or lane change with thislever. Push down on the lever tosignal a left turn, and up to signal aright turn. If you push it up or downall the way, the turn signal continuesto blink even when you release thelever. It shuts off automatically asyou complete the turn.

CONTINUED

Instrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights Turn Signals



TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLEEVVEERR

To signal a lane change, push lightlyon the turn signal lever in the properdirection and hold it. The lever willreturn to the center position as soonas you release it.

This lever controls the windshieldwipers and washers. It has fivepositions:

MIST: mistOFF: offINT: intermittentLO: low speedHI: high speed

To select a position, push the leverup or down.

In intermittent, the wipers operateevery few seconds. In low speed andhigh speed, the wipers run continu-ously.



Windshield Wipers

78

To operate the wipers in mist mode,push the control lever up from theOFF position. The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.This gives you a quick way to clearthe windshield.

To clean the windshield, pull back onthe wiper control lever. The washersspray until you release the lever.

The wipers run at low speed whileyou’re pulling the lever, thencomplete one more sweep of thewindshield after you release it.



Windshield Washers

79

The rotating switch on the rightlever controls the rear window wiperand washer.

To activate the rear windshield wiper,rotate the switch to ‘‘ON’’. The wiperoperates every seven seconds aftercompleting two sweeps. When youturn the wiper switch to the ‘‘OFF’’position or turn off the ignitionswitch, the wiper will return to itsparked position.

To use the wiper and washer, rotateand hold the switch one position upfrom ‘‘ON’’. The wiper opreateswhile you are holding the switch,then completes two more sweepsafter you release it. To use thewasher only, rotate and hold theswitch one position down from‘‘OFF’’.

The rear wiper will not work if thehatch glass is not fully closed.

If you open the hatch glass while therear wiper is operating, the wiper willstop. To return the wiper to itsparked position, close the hatchglass, and then rotate the switch tothe ‘‘OFF’’ position.

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid reservoir as the wind-shield washer.


Rear Window Wiper and Washer


Push the button between the centerair vents to turn on the hazardwarning lights (four-way flashers).This causes all four outside turnsignals and both indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The light in thebutton lights to show the defogger ison.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side to side.



Hazard Warning Rear Window Defogger

81

To release the parking brake, pushand hold the release button on theside of the parking brake lever, pullthe lever toward you slightly, thenpush the lever forward.

The parking brake light on theinstrument panel should go out whenthe parking brake is fully released(see page ).

To apply the parking brake, firmlypull the parking brake lever towardyou.

66



Parking Brake

82

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEELLEEVVEERR

RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel to thedesired position, making sure thewheel points toward your chest,not toward your face. Make sureyou can see the instrument panelgauges and the indicator lights.

To adjust the steering wheel upwardor downward:

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

1.

2.

3.

4.

See page for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.

20



Steering Wheel Adjustment

83

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry them immedi-ately with a soft cloth.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Your vehicle comes with two masterkeys and a valet key.The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle:• Ignition• Doors• Glove Box• Tailgate

The valet key works only in theignition, the door locks and thetailgate. You can keep the glove boxlocked when you leave your vehicleand the valet key at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber plate with your set of keys.You will need this key number if youever have to get a lost key replaced.Keep the plate stored in a safe place.When replacing keys, use onlyHonda-approved key blanks.

Keys

Keys and Locks


VVAALLEETTKKEEYY((GGrraayy))

KKEEYYNNUUMMBBEERRPPLLAATTEE

MMAASSTTEERRKKEEYYSS((BBllaacckk))

Some models also come with tworemote transmitters; see page foran explanation of their operation.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object is near theignition switch when you insert thekey. To make sure the systemrecognizes the key code:

The Immobilizer System protectsyour vehicle from theft. A properly-coded master or valet key must beused in the ignition switch for theengine to start. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used,the engine’s fuel system is disabled. Do not keep other immobilizer

keys on the same key ring.

Use a plastic or leather key fob,not metal.

Keep other keys away from yourvehicle’s key and the ignitionswitch while trying to start theengine.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Honda dealer.

89

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter Immobilizer System

Keys and Locks


The Immobilizer System indicatorwill also blink several times whenyou turn the ignition switch from ON(II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourHonda dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undriveable.

The ignition switch is on the rightside of the steering column. It hasfour positions:• LOCK (0)• ACCESSORY (I)• ON (II)• START (III)

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Keys and Locks


Ignition Switch

86

－－

－

－

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To switch from ACCESSORY toLOCK, you must push the key inslightly as you turn it. If your vehiclehas an automatic transmission, theshift lever must also be in Park. Theanti-theft lock will lock the steeringcolumn when you remove the key.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may sometimes makeit difficult to turn the key fromLOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turnthe steering wheel to the left or tothe right as you turn the key.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

The engine will not start if theImmobilizer System does notrecognize the key’s coding (see page

).

This is the normal keyposition when driving. All featuresand accessories on the vehicle areusable. Several of the lights on theinstrument panel come on as a testwhen you turn the ignition switchfrom ACCESSORY to ON.

In this position,you can operate the audio systemand the accessory power sockets.

85

Keys and Locks


LOCK (0) START (III)

ON (II)

ACCESSORY (I)

87

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out the vehicle, push the locktab down and close the door. To lockthe driver’s door, remove the keyfrom the ignition switch, pull theoutside door handle and push thelock tab down or push the masterswitch down. Release the handle,then close the door.

Each door has a lock tab at the top ofthe door. When you push down thelock tab on the driver’s door, alldoors and the tailgate lock. Pullingup the lock tab on the driver’s doorunlocks only that door. The lock tabon each passenger’s door only locksand unlocks that door.

The front doors can be locked andunlocked from the outside with thekey.

The master door lock switch on thedriver’s door locks and unlocks all ofthe doors and tailgate. Push theswitch down to lock all of the doorsand the tailgate, and up to unlockthem.

Keys and Locks


Power Door Locks

88

MMAASSTTEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKK SSWWIITTCCHH

CONTINUED

When you push the LOCK button asecond time within 5 seconds, thehorn will sound once to verify thatthe doors and the tailgate are locked.

When you push the UNLOCK buttononce, only the driver’s door unlocks.The remaining doors and the tailgateunlock when you push the button asecond time. The front turn signals,parking lights, side marker lights,taillights, license plate light, and theinstrument panel lights flash twiceeach time you push the button.

All doors and the tailgate lock whenyou push down the lock tab on thedriver’s door, or lock the driver’sdoor from the outside with the key.Only the driver’s door unlocks whenyou use the key or the lock tab. Tounlock the passenger’s doors, usethe master door lock switch or thelock tab on each door.

You can lock and unlock your vehiclewith the remote transmitter. Whenyou push the LOCK button, all doorsand the tailgate lock. The front turnsignals, parking lights, side markerlights, taillights, license plate light,and the instrument panel lights flashonce.

On EX model in the U.S., and EX andEX-L models in Canada

Keys and Locks


Remote Transmitter

89

UUNNLLOOCCKKBBUUTTTTOONN

PPAANNIICCBBUUTTTTOONN

LLOOCCKKBBUUTTTTOONN

HHAATTCCHHGGLLAASSSSRREELLEEAASSEEBBUUTTTTOONN

LLEEDD

The ceiling light (if the light switchis in the center position) will comeon when you press the UNLOCKbutton. If you do not open any of thedoors or the tailgate, the light willfade out in about 30 seconds, thedoors and the tailgate automaticallyrelock. If you relock the doors andthe tailgate with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the light will go offimmediately.

You cannot lock the doors and thetailgate with the remote transmitterif any door or the tailgate is not fullyclosed. You cannot lock or unlockthe doors and the tailgate with thekey in the ignition switch.

To open the hatch glass, push theHatch Glass Release button forabout two seconds. The hatch glasswill not open if the key is in theignition switch.

Even if the hatch glass is opened, thetailgate can be locked with theremote transmitter. Make sure tocheck the hatch glass manually.

Panic mode allows you to remotelyactivate your vehicle’s horn andlights to attract attention. Whenactivated, the horn will sound, andthe headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, taillights andinstrument panel lights will flash forabout 30 seconds. To activate panicmode, press and hold the PANICbutton for about one second.

To cancel Panic mode before 30seconds, press any button on theremote transmitter. You can alsoturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Panic mode will not activate if theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

Keys and Locks


Panic Mode

90

＋

▽◎

CONTINUED

Battery type: CR2025

When the remote transmitter’sbattery begins to get weak, it maytake several pushes on the button tolock or unlock the doors and tailgate,and the LED will not light. Replacethe battery as soon as possible.

To replace the battery, remove theround cover on the back of the trans-mitter by turning it counterclockwisewith a coin.

Remove the old battery and note thepolarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same ( sidefacing up), then insert it in thetransmitter.

Align the mark on the coverwith the mark on thetransmitter, then set the cover inplace and turn it clockwise.

Keys and Locks


Replacing the Battery

91

OOppeenn

CClloossee

RROOUUNNDDCCOOVVEERR

BBAATTTTEERRYY

Avoid severe shock to the trans-mitter, such as dropping or throwingit. Also, protect it from extreme hotor cold temperatures.

Clean the transmitter case with asoft cloth. Do not use strongcleaners or solvents that could harmthe case. Immersing the transmitterin any liquid will harm the trans-mitter and cause it to not functionproperly.

If you lose a transmitter, you willneed to have the replacementprogrammed to your vehicle’ssystem by your Honda dealer. Anyother transmitters you have will alsoneed to be reprogrammed.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Keys and Locks


Transmitter Care

92

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up and use the outside doorhandle.

You can lock or unlock the tailgate inany of these ways:

Use your master or valet key tolock and unlock the tailgate.Turn the key clockwise to lock thetailgate, and counterclockwise tounlock it.

Lock the tailgate by pushing downthe lock tab on the driver’s door,or by using the master or valet keyin the driver’s door lock.

Lock or unlock the tailgate withthe master door lock switch.

You can also lock and unlock thetailgate with the remotetransmitter (see page ).89

CONTINUED


Childproof Door Locks Tailgate

Keys and Locks


LLoocckk

LLEEVVEERR

LLoocckk PPoossiittiioonn

UUnnlloocckkPPoossiittiioonn

You can unlock the hatch glass inany of these ways:

Press the hatch glass releasebutton on the driver’s door.

With the tailgate unlocked, open thetailgate by pulling the handle.

To keep the tailgate door open on anincline, use the stop from the tool kit.The tool kit is in the storage binunder the cargo floor. Put the stopon the support strut as shown.Make sure to remove the stop beforeclosing the tailgate.

Opening the Hatch Glass

Keys and Locks


HHAANNDDLLEE SSTTOOPP

You can open the hatch glass toaccess the cargo area with thetailgate closed. Make sure thetailgate and the hatch glass areclosed and locked securely beforedriving.

The rear wiper will not operate withthe hatch glass open. If you open thehatch glass while the rear wiper isoperating, the wiper will stop (seepage ).

See page for information oncargo loading. Keep the tailgate andthe hatch glass closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thetailgate and the hatch glass, and toprevent exhaust gas from gettinginto the interior. See

on page .Press and hold the hatch glassrelease button on the remotetransmitter for about two seconds(see page ).

Use the master or valet key in thetailgate lock. Turn the keyclockwise as far as it will go.

The hatch glass will pop up slightly.To open the hatch glass, lift it upfully.

Make sure the rear wiper switch isoff and the wiper is in its parkedposition before opening the hatchglass.

To close the hatch glass, lower it,then press on the handle until itlatches.

90

80

193

60


Keys and Locks


CarbonMonoxide Hazard

95

HHAATTCCHH GGLLAASSSS

HHAATTCCHH GGLLAASSSS OOPPEENN PPOOSSIITTIIOONN

Open the glove box by pulling thebottom of the handle. Close it with afirm push. Lock or unlock the glovebox with the master key.

The glove box light comes on onlywhen the instrument panel lights areon.

Glove Box

Keys and Locks


LLoocckk

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 15

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To change the angle of the seat-back,pull up on the lever on the outside ofthe seat bottom. Move the seat-backto the desired position and releasethe lever. Let the seat-back latch inthe new position.

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

Front Seat Adjustments

Seats


To adjust the height of the driver’sseat, turn the dial on the outside ofthe seat bottom. Each front seat has an armrest on

the side of the seat-back. To use it,pivot it down.

Only on vehicles with an automatictransmission

Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Front Seat Armrests


Seats

98

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

16

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions.

The head restraints help protect youand your passengers from whiplashand other injuries. They are mosteffective when you adjust them sothe back of the occupant’s head restsagainst the center of the restraint. Ataller person should adjust therestraint as high as possible.

The head restraints in the front andrear outboard seating positionsadjust for height. You need bothhands to adjust the restraint. Do notattempt to adjust it while driving. Toraise it, pull upward. To lower therestraint, push the release buttonsideways and push the restraintdown.

To remove a front head restraint or ahead restraint in one of the rearoutboard seating positions forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release button,then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

To remove the rear center headrestraint, pull it up and out of theseat-back.

Head Restraints

Seats


RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEAARR CCEENNTTEERR

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 15

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

The seat position and seat-backangle of the left and right sides ofthe rear seat can be adjustedseparately.

To adjust the rear seat forward andbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

To change the angle of the seat-back,pull up on the release lever on theoutside of the seat-back. Move theseat-back to the desired position,then release the lever. Make surethe seat-back latches in the newposition.

Seats


Rear Seat Adjustments

100

When using the center seatingposition, adjust the left and right sideof the rear seats to the same position.

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-backs after you adjust the rear seats.

The rear seat armrest is located inthe center of the rear seat. Pivot itdown to use it.

Seats


Rear Seat Armrest

101

Adjust the rear seats as far backas they will go.

Remove the head restraints fromthe front seats (see page ).

Store the head restraints in thefront seat-back pockets.

You can recline the seat-backs on thefront seats to a fully flat position sothey are level with the rear seatcushions, making a large cushionedarea. To do this:

2.1.99

Seats


Reclining the Front Seats

102

CONTINUED

Adjust the front seats forward asfar as they will go. Pull up the seat-back angle adjustment lever andpivot the seat-back backward.Release the lever when the seat-back is level with the rear seatcushion.

Move the front seat backwarduntil it touches the rear seat.

Adjust the rear seat-back to thedesired position.

4.3. 5.

Seats


SSEEAATT--BBAACCKK AANNGGLLEEAADDJJUUSSTTMMEEHHTT LLEEVVEERR

SSLLIIDDEE BBAARR

Reverse this procedure to return thefront and rear seats to the uprightposition. Make sure you install thehead restraints and the seats arelocked securely before driving.

When you return the seat-back tothe upright position, hold the seat-back to keep it from going up tooquickly.

The rear seat-back can be foldeddown to give more cargo room. Eachside folds down separately. With onlyhalf the seat folded, you can stillcarry a passenger in the rear seat.

You can also fold up each of the rearseats separately to create furthercargo space (see page ).

Push the seat belt buckles into theseat cushion.

1.

106

Seats


Folding the Rear Seats

104

BBUUCCKKLLEE

CONTINUED

When you are folding the right halfof the rear seat, use the latch plate torelease the center seat belt from thedetachable anchor (see page ).Allow the seat belt to retract into theholder on the ceiling and store thebuckles in it.

Lower the head restraint to itslowest position.

Pull up on the release lever on theoutside of the seat-back.

Fold the seat-back forward.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat-back to the upright position.Tug on the seat-back to make sure itis latched. Position the seat belt infront of the seat-back. Make sure theseat is locked securely before driving.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded.

3.

2.

4.

108

Seats


LLAATTCCHH PPLLAATTEE

RREELLEEAASSEE LLEEVVEERR

To fold up the rear seat:

Follow steps 1 through 4 on pagesand for folding down the

seat-back.

Unlock the seat from the floor bypulling the lock release strapunder the seat cushion’s backedge, then lift the rear of the seat.You cannot fold up the rear seat ifit is not latched securely in therearmost position.

Pivot the seat forward.

Pull out the fastening strap fromthe slit on the seat-back. Move thefront seat forward slightly, thenattach the anchor on the fasteningstrap to the hook on the bottom ofthe front seat. Adjust the frontseat to the desired position.

Pull up the bar under the seatcushion and slide the rear seatbackward.The rear seat will not fold up if it isnot back as far as it will go.

104

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

105

Seats


SSLLIIDDEE BBAARR

LLOOCCKK RREELLEEAASSEESSTTRRAAPP

FFAASSTTEENNIINNGGSSTTRRAAPP

Tighten the strap to remove anyslack and make sure the seat issecure.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to the upright position.Make sure the seat is securelylatched before driving.When you are not using thefastening strap, roll up the strap andstore it properly into the slit on theseat-back.

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-backs.

In the center seating position of therear seat, be sure the detachableanchor is latched securely beforeusing the seat belt (see page ).

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard. Seeon page .

108

193

6.

Seats


Carrying Cargo

107

The seat belt in the rear center seatis equipped with a detachable anchor.This allows the center seat belt to beunlatched when the right side of therear seat is folded.

To unlatch the detachable anchorbefore folding the seat-back, insertthe latch plate into the slot on theside of the anchor buckle and allowthe seat belt to retract. Store thedetachable anchor and seat belt latchplates in the retractor housing.

When the seat-back is returned to itsupright position, latch the detachableanchor by lining up the trianglemarks on the small latch plate andanchor buckle, then inserting theplate into the buckle. Tug on the seatbelt to verify that the detachableanchor is securely latched. Makesure the seat belt is not twisted.

Seats


Detachable Anchor

108

LLAATTCCHH PPLLAATTEE

AANNCCHHOORR BBUUCCKKLLEE SSMMAALLLL LLAATTCCHHPPLLAATTEE

TTRRIIAANNGGLLEEMMAARRKKSS

Using the seat belt with thedetachable anchor unlatchedincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt,make sure the detachableanchor is correctly latched.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The ignition switchmust be ON (II) to use them. Pushthe heater switch to turn the poweron or off. The pilot lamp lights andremains on while the heaters are on.

Do not use the seat heaters when theengine is off or when idling for along period of time. They can drainthe battery, making your vehiclehard to start.

Because of the sensors for the sideairbag system, there is no heater inthe seat-back.

On EX-L model in Canada

Seat Heaters


PPAASSSSEENNGGEERR’’SS SSEEAATT HHEEAATTEERR SSWWIITTCCHH

DDRRIIVVEERR’’SS SSEEAATT HHEEAATTEERR SSWWIITTCCHH

The driver’s door armrest has amaster power window control panel.To open any of the passengers’ win-dows, push down on the appropriateswitch and hold it until the windowreaches the desired position. Toclose the window, pull back on thewindow switch. Release the switchwhen the window gets to the positionyou want.

Your vehicle’s windows are electri-cally-powered. Turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II) to raise or lowerany window.

Each door has a switch that controlsits window. To open the window,push the switch down and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Close thewindow by pulling back on theswitch and holding it.


Power Windows

110

DDRRIIVVEERR’’SS WWIINNDDOOWW SSWWIITTCCHH

MMAAIINN SSWWIITTCCHH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

－

The master control panel also con-tains these extra features:

To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down, then release it.The window automatically goesdown all the way. To stop thewindow from going all the way down,pull back on the window switchbriefly.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. The windowautomatically goes all the way up. Tostop the window from going all theway up, push down on the windowswitch briefly.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

The light inside the AUTO switchcomes on when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

The MAIN switch controls power tothe passengers’ windows. When youpush in the MAIN switch, thepassengers’ windows cannot beraised or lowered. The MAIN switchdoes not affect the driver’s window.To cancel this feature, push on theswitch again. Keep the MAIN switchpushed in when you have children inthe vehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

Power Windows


AUTO

111

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function will be disabled. Thepower window system needs to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse. You should dothe following.

Start the engine. Push down onthe driver’s window switch untilthe window is fully open.

Pull back on the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by a Honda dealer.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If the driver’s window runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close thewindow, remove the obstacle, thenuse the window switch again.

1.

2.

Power Windows


Auto Reverse

112

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button( ). To close the moonroof,press and hold the top of the switch( ). To open the moonroof,press and hold the bottom of theswitch ( ). Release the switchwhen the moonroof gets to thedesired position. Make sureeveryone’s hands are away from themoonroof before opening or closingit.

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe ON (II).

On EX model in the U.S., and EX-Lmodel in Canada


Moonroof

113

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch so you can’tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the switch.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Adjust the outside mirrors with theadjustment switch on the driver’sdoor armrest:

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

3.

4.1.

2.


Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

114

SSEELLEECCTTOORR SSWWIITTCCHH

TTAABB

AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT SSWWIITTCCHH

To use the center table, pull up theoutside edge of the table until itlatches. To store it, pull the lever andlower the table.

The outside mirrors are heated to re-move fog and frost. With the ignitionswitch ON (II), turn on the heatersby pressing the button. The light inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

Sitting on or getting under the table,or putting heavy objects on the table,may damage or deform it.

Do not put any items on the tablewhile driving. They may fall down orfly around when you go aroundcorners or brake hard.

On EX and EX-L models in Canada


Mirrors, Center Table

Center Table

115

The center table has a beverageholder for the front passengers.

The rear seat also has a beverageholder in the center armrest. To useit, pivot the armrest down. To use the front beverage holder,

pull on the handle. Push the holderall the way in to close it.



Beverage Holders

116

CONTINUED

The cargo area floor can be takenout and used as a table.

To remove the table, pull up thecarpet. Lift and pull on the handle toslide the table out.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holder. A spilled liquid thatis very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids can alsodamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.


Built-in Table

Beverage Holders, Built-in Table

117

HHAANNDDLLEE

Unfold the legs. Lock them in placeby pushing on the middle of thelocking arms. Make sure all four arelocked.

To fold the legs, pull on the middleof each locking arm.

To put the table back in place, holdon the handle and put the projectionon the table into the hole in thecargo area floor.

Built-in Table


Be sure to lock the legs of thetable.Do not stand on the table.Do not put a weight of over 44 lbs(20 kg) on the table.Hot items such as pots, pans, orkettles should not be placeddirectly on the table top.

A storage box is located under thefront passenger’s seat. To use it, pullupward slightly on the front centeredge of the box and slide it out.

Open the center pocket by pullingthe handle. Close it with a firm push.

CONTINUED



Storage BoxCenter PocketUsing the Built-in Table

Built-in Table, Center Pocket, Storage Box

119

To remove the box for cleaning, pullupward on the front center edge todisengage the locking tabs under theseat bottom, then pull the box out.

To open the driver’s pocket, swingthe lid down. Close it with a firmpush. The coin tray is located on the center

dashboard. To open the coin tray,pull on the bottom edge. Close itwith a firm push. The light in thetray comes on when the instrumentpanel lights are on.

Only on vehicles with a manualtransmission

Driver’s Pocket Coin Tray

Storage Box, Driver’s Pocket, Coin Tray


DDRRIIVVEERR’’SS PPOOCCKKEETT

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. It will unlatch andswing down. To close it, push it untilit latches. Make sure the holder isclosed while you are driving.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they aresmall enough to let the holder closeand latch, and that they are notheavy enough to cause the holder topop open while driving.


Sunglasses Holder

121

PPuusshh

SSUUNNGGLLAASSSSEESS HHOOLLDDEERR

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps). To power an accessory, theignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

When both sockets are being used,the combined power rating of bothaccessories should be 120 watts orless (10 amps).

They will not power an automotivetype cigarette lighter element.Your vehicle has two accessory

power sockets. One is located on thedashboard, and the other is on theleft side of the cargo area.

To use an accessory power socket,pull up on the cover.


Accessory Power Sockets

122

FFrroonntt RReeaarr

PPuullll uupp

PPuullll uupp

To open the dashboard pocket,swing the lid down. Close it with afirm push.

Dashboard Pocket


If you leave any door open with thekey not in the ignition switch, theceiling light will go off after threeminutes.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) comes on whenyou remove the key from the ignitionswitch. If you do not open a door, thelight fades out in about 30 seconds.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) also comes onwhen you unlock the door with thekey, the lock tab on the driver’s door,the master door lock switch, or theremote transmitter (see page ).

Turn on a spotlight by pushing thebutton next to each light. Push thebutton again to turn it off. You canuse the spotlights at all times.

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch. In the OFF position, the lightdoes not come on. In the centerposition, the ceiling light comes onwhen you open any door. After alldoors are closed tightly, the lightfades out in about 30 seconds. In theON position, the ceiling light stayson continuously.

90


Interior Lights

Ceiling Light Spotlights

124

OOFFFF

OONN

DDOOOORR AACCTTIIVVAATTEEDD

The cargo area light has a three-position switch. In the OFF position,the light does not come on. In thecenter position, the light comes onwhen you open the tailgate or thehatch glass. In the ON position, thelight stays on continuously.

The ignition switch light comes onwhen you unlock the driver’s door,and fades out about 30 seconds afteryou close the door.

Interior Lights


Cargo Area Light Ignition Switch Light

125

OOFFFF

OONN

TTAAIILLGGAATTEE//HHAATTCCHH GGLLAASSSS AACCTTIIVVAATTEEDD

IIGGNNIITTIIOONN SSWWIITTCCHH LLIIGGHHTT

126

.....................Heating and Cooling . 128.........What Each Control Does . 128

............How to Use the System . 131..........To Turn Everything Off . 136

................................Audio System . 137Audio System (U.S. and

........................Canadian LX) . 138AM/FM/Cassette/CD Audio

....................................System . 138.................Operating the Radio . 139.................Adjusting the Sound . 143

............Audio System Lighting . 144..............................Digital Clock . 144

.........Operating the CD Player . 146....CD Player Error Indications . 148.....Operating the CD Changer . 149

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 150

Operating the Cassette.....................................Player . 151

............Tape Search Functions . 152Audio System (U.S. EX and

.......Canadian EX and EX-L) . 154AM/FM/Cassette/CD

........Changer Audio System . 154.................Operating the Radio . 155

.................Adjusting the Sound . 159............Audio System Lighting . 160

....................Radio Frequencies . 160........................Radio Reception . 161

..............................Digital Clock . 162Operating the Cassette

.....................................Player . 164............Tape Search Functions . 165

Caring for the Cassette.....................................Player . 168

.....Operating the CD Changer . 169..Loading CDs in the Changer . 170

...................................Operation . 172Removing CDs from the

.................................Changer . 174.......Protecting Compact Discs . 176

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 177

.......................Theft Protection . 178...............................Cruise Control . 179

Comfort and Convenience Features

Comfort and Convenience Features 127

Proper use of the Heating andCooling system can make theinterior dry and comfortable, andkeep the windows clear for bestvisibility.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe fan’s speed, which increases airflow.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the air flow.

This button turns the air condi-tioning ON and OFF. The indicatorin the button lights when the A/C ison.

This button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator in this button is lit, airfrom the vehicle’s interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside thevehicle (Fresh Air mode).

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).

Use the MODE control dial to selectthe vents the air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardvents in all modes.

81


Heating and Cooling

What Each Control Does

Fan Control Dial

Temperature Control Dial

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control Dial

128

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONNBBUUTTTTOONN

MMOODDEE CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALLFFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLLDDIIAALL

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREECCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW DDEEFFOOGGGGEERRBBUUTTTTOONN

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGGBBUUTTTTOONN

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches toRecirculation mode. Air flows fromthe center and side vents in thedashboard.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Air flow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Air flow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.

With these two modes, the A/Cstays on.

Heating and Cooling


The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable.

To adjust the air flow from eachcenter vent, move the tab up-and-down and side-to-side.

The vents in the corners of thedashboard can be opened and closedwith the dials next to them.

To adjust the air flow from each sidevent, pivot the vent up-and-down andmove the tab side-to-side.

Heating and Cooling


Vent Controls

130

OOppeenn

CClloossee

CCEENNTTEERR VVEENNTTSS

TTAABB

DDRRIIVVEERR’’SS SSIIDDEE VVEENNTT PPAASSSSEENNGGEERR’’SS--SSIIDDEE VVEENNTT

OOppeenn

CClloossee

CONTINUED

Turn the temperature control dialall the way to the left.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keepthese clear of leaves and otherdebris.

It is best to leave the system in FreshAir mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in Recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to Recirculation mode whenyou are driving through smoky ordusty conditions, then switch back toFresh Air mode when the conditionclears.

This section covers how to set up thesystem controls for ventilation,heating, cooling, dehumidifying, anddefrosting.

The engine must be running for theheater and air conditioning togenerate hot and cold air. The heateruses engine coolant to warm the air.If the engine is cold, it will be severalminutes before you feel warm aircoming from the system.The air conditioning does not rely onengine temperature.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the tailgate.

1.

2.3.

Heating and Cooling


Ventilation

How to Use the System

131

MMOODDEE CCOONNTTRROOLLDDIIAALL


FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLLDDIIAALL



Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The light in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is all the way to the left.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:

Set the mode control dial to MAXA/C.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects andswitches to Recirculation mode.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is all the way to the left.Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

1.

2.

3.


Heating and Cooling

To Cool with A/C

132




MMAAXX AA//CCPPOOSSIITTIIOONN



If the interior is very warm frombeing parked in the sun, you can coolit down more rapidly by setting upthe controls this way:

Start the engine.Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. Make sure the tempera-ture control dial is all the way tothe left.Set the fan to maximum speed.Open the windows partially. Select

and Fresh Air mode.

When the interior has cooled downto a more comfortable temperature,close the windows and set thecontrols as described for normalcooling.

To warm the interior:Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

) when driving in stop-and-gotraffic or climbing a long, steep hill.If it moves near the red zone, turnoff the A/C until the gauge readsnormally.

Start the engine.Select .Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

1.2.

3.4.

74 1.2.3.4.

CONTINUED

Heating and Cooling


To Heat

133

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

Set the fan to the desired speed.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and Fresh Air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial so the mixture of heated andcooled air feels comfortable.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.Adjust the temperature controldial so the air flow from thedefroster vents feels warm.Turn on the rear window defoggerto help clear the rear window.When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

To remove exterior frost or ice fromthe windshield and side windowsafter the vehicle has been sitting outin cold weather:

Start the engine.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switchesto Fresh Air mode and turns onthe A/C.Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum.

To rapidly remove exterior frost orice from the windshield (on very colddays), first select the Recirculationmode. Once the windshield is clear,select the Fresh Air mode to avoidfogging the windows.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.

3.

4.

1.2.

3.

To Heat and Dehumidify with AirConditioning

To Defog and Defrost

Heating and Cooling

Comfort and Convenience Features134

These settings direct all the air flowto the defroster vents at the base ofthe windshield and the side windowdefroster vents. The air flow will getwarmer and clear the windows fasteras the engine warms up. You canclose the side vents with the dialbeside each vent. This will sendmore warm air to the windshielddefroster vents.

For safety, make sure you have aclear view through all the windowsbefore driving away.

Heating and Cooling






RREEAARR DDEEFFOOGGGGEERRBBUUTTTTOONN


To shut off the system temporarily,turn the fan speed and temperaturecontrol dials all the way to the left.

You should shut the systemcompletely off only for the first fewminutes of driving in cold weather,until the engine coolant warms upenough to operate the heater. Keepthe fan on at all other times so staleair does not build up in the interior.

To Turn Everything Off


Heating and Cooling

136

Your vehicle has either of the audiosystems described in this section.Read the appropriate pages in thissection for operation of the audiosystem installed in your vehicle.

Also, read page for how to takecare of your cassette player.

If your vehicle has a different audiosystem from these two types, readthe radio manufacturer’s manual thatcame with your vehicle for itsoperation.

pages 138 to 153 for LX modelpages 154 to 177 for EX and EX-Lmodels

168


Audio System

EX and EX-L Models

LX Model

137

Your Honda’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thevehicle’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).178

On LX model in the U.S. and Canada

Audio System


AM/FM/Cassette/CD AudioSystem

138

CONTINUED

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pressing the PWR/VOL knob, or the AM or FM button.Adjust the volume by turning theknob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

Operating the Radio

Audio System


FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN

SSEEEEKK BBUUTTTTOONNSS

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBBPPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN

－

－

○ ○

－

－－＋

To store a frequency:

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.

Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the Preset buttons.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the TUNE knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, or to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.Turn the knob right or left until thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, presseither SEEK button ( or ), thenrelease it. Depending on whichSEEK button you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Audio System


TUNE

SEEK

SCAN

Preset

140

－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

CONTINUED

AUTO SELECT

Audio System


AA.. SSEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AA.. SSEELL BBUUTTTTOONN

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

Audio System


TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB


SSCCAANN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS SSEEEEKK BBUUTTTTOONNSS

－

－

These twocontrols adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.The Balance control adjusts the side-to-side strength, while the Fadercontrol adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

To adjust the fader, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,and adjust the front-to-back sound toyour liking. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

To adjust the balance, push on theTREBLE/BALANCE control knobto get it to pop out. Pull it out slightlyfarther, and adjust the side-to-sidesound to your liking. Push the knobback in when you are done so youcannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

Use these controlsto adjust the tone to your liking.

To adjust the Treble level, push onthe TREBLE/BALANCE controlknob to get it to pop out. Withoutpulling it out farther, turn the knobto adjust the treble level. Push theknob back in when you are done soyou cannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

To adjust the Bass level, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Without pulling it outfarther, turn the knob to adjust thebass level. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

Adjusting the SoundBalance/Fader

Treble/Bass

Audio System


BBAASSSS//FFAADDEERRCCOONNTTRROOLL

TTRREEBBLLEE//BBAALLAANNCCEECCOONNTTRROOLL

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

For information, See page .

The audio system display usuallyshows the time when the ignitionswitch is in ACCESSORY (I) or ON(II). It shows the operation mode ofthe radio, cassette player, CD player,or optional CD changer when youoperate them, then goes back to thetime display after five seconds.

If an error occurs while operatingthe CD player or optional CDchanger, the display will keepshowing the error code and will notswitch to the time display until theerror is corrected (see pages and

).

You can set the time only when theclock is displayed.

To set the time, press the CLOCK(SCAN/RPT) button until you hear abeep. The displayed time begins toblink.

Press and hold the H (Preset 4)button until the hour advances to thedesired time.

Press and hold the M (Preset 5)button until the minutes advance tothe desired time.

Press the CLOCK (SCAN/RPT)button again to enter the set time.

160

148150

77

Audio System


Audio System Lighting

Radio Frequencies and Reception

Digital Clock

144

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, the clock is setback to the previous hour bypressing the CLOCK (SCAN/RPT)button until you hear a beep, thenpressing the RESET (Preset 6)button. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, the clock is setforward to the beginning of the nexthour.

For example:

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the timesetting will be lost. To set the timeagain, follow the setting procedure.

1:06 would RESET to 1:001:52 would RESET to 2:00

Audio System


RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN

CCLLOOCCKK BBUUTTTTOONN

HH BBUUTTTTOONN

MM BBUUTTTTOONN

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

With the system on, insert the discinto the CD slot. Push the disc inhalfway, the drive will pull it in therest of the way and begin to play.The number of the track that isplaying is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. Playonly standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

For best results when using CD-Rdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R, the recordingmust be closed in order for the discto be used by CD players. CD-RWdiscs will not work in this unit.

Operating the CD Player

Audio System


RRDDMM BBUUTTTTOONNRREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN

SSKKIIPP BBUUTTTTOONNSS

CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD SSLLOOTT

－○

○

－

○

○

＋－

＋

－

You can use the SKIP buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressthe RDM button. You will see RDMin the display. The system will thenselect and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold an appropriate SKIP button.Press the button to move forward,or the button to move backward.Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the Repeatbutton. You will see REPEAT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRepeat button again to turn it off.

Each time you press the buttonand release it, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release thebutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressand release it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play that disc again.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM orFM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.176

RANDOM PLAY

REPEAT

Protecting Compact Discs

Audio System


IndicationIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

SolutionCause

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Cheak the disc for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pilled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Honda dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Will disappear when the temperatue returns tonormal.

Mechanical Error

High temperature

CD Player Error Indications

Audio System


－

A Compact Disc changer is availablefrom your dealer. It holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.

Load the desired CD’s in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

For best results when using CD-Rdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R, the recordingmust be closed in order for the discto be used by CD players. CD-RWdiscs will not work in this unit.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.

If you eject the disc in the in-dashCD while it is playing, the systemwill automatically switch to the CDchanger and begin play where it leftoff. If there are no CDs in thechanger, the display will flash. Youwill have to select another mode(AM or FM) with the button.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.176

Operating the CD Changer(Optional)


Audio System


IndicationIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the optionalCD changer, find the cause in thechart to the right. If you cannot clearthe error indication, take the vehicleto your Honda dealer.

Cause Solution

Disc-changermalfunctionDisc is in changermechanismHigh temperature

Misconnection ordisconnection of CDchangerNo CD magazine in theCD changerNo CD in magazine

Consult your Honda dealer.

Press the magazine eject button, and insert anempty magazine.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

See your Honda dealer.

Insert CD magazine.

Insert CD in magazine.

CD Changer Error Indications

Audio System


＊

＊

CONTINUED

The cassette system features Dolbynoise reduction, automatic sensing ofchromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, andautoreverse for continuous play.

To operate the cassette player, theignition switch must be inACCESSORY(I) or ON(II). Makesure the tape opening on the cassetteis facing to the right, then insert thecassette most of the way into the slot.The system will pull it in the rest ofthe way, and begin to play.

2

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Operating the Cassette Player

Audio System


FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

PPLLAAYYBBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN

PPRROOGG BBUUTTTTOONN CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN


NNOOIISSEE RREEDDUUCCTTIIOONNBBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWWBBUUTTTTOONN

▲

－

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the REW button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the FFbutton. You will see FF displayed.Press the PLAY button to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.If the system reaches the end of thetape while in fast forward or rewind,it automatically stops that function,reverses direction, and begins to play.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. The indi-cator will light in the display. If thetape was not recorded with Dolbynoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the button.

Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the buttonagain.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press the AM,FM or CD button. To change back tothe cassette player, push the TAPEbutton.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

You can remove the cassette withthe ignition switch in any position,even if the audio system is turned off.

Tape Search Functions

FF/REW

Audio System


－－

○

○

－

＋

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the REPEATbutton to activate it; you will seeREPEAT displayed as a reminder.When the system reaches the end ofthe song or passage currentlyplaying, it will automatically go intorewind. When it senses thebeginning of the same song orpassage, the system returns to PLAYmode. It will continue to repeat thissame program until you deactivateREPEAT by pressing the buttonagain.

The SKIP function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To skip to the beginningof a song or passage currentlyplaying, push the button. You willsee REW flashing in the display asthe tape rewinds. To skip to thebeginning of the next song, push the

button. You will see FF flashing inthe display as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds the begin-ning of a song or passage, it goesback to PLAY.

Damaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page for information oncassette care and protection.

168

REPEATSKIP

Caring for Cassettes

Audio System


＊

＊

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

The in-dash CD changer holds up tosix discs. You operate the CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. See page for CDchanger operation.

Your Honda’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The cassette system features Dolbynoise reduction, automatic sensing ofchromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, andautoreverse for continuous play.

169

2


AM/FM/Cassette/CD ChangerAudio System

Audio System


TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN SSTTEERREEOOIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN

SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN SSEEEEKK BBUUTTTTOONNSSPPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

－

－

○ ○－＋

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pressing the PWR/VOL knob, or the AM or FM button.Adjust the volume by turning theknob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the Preset buttons.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the TUNE knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, or to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.Turn the knob right or left until thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, presseither SEEK button ( or ), thenrelease it. Depending on whichSEEK button you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thevehicle’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).178

CONTINUED

Operating the Radio

TUNE

SEEK

Audio System


－－The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

To store a frequency:

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.

1.

2.

3.

4.

SCAN Preset

Audio System


－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored. CONTINUED

Audio System


AUTO SELECT

157

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

AA.. SSEELLBBUUTTTTOONN

AA.. SSEELLIINNDDIICCAATTOORR


FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBBAAMM BBUUTTTTOONN

SSEEEEKK BBUUTTTTOONNSS

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

Audio System


PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

AA.. SSEELLBBUUTTTTOONN

AA.. SSEELLIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN


AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS SSEEEEKK BBUUTTTTOONNSS

－

－

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the TUNEknob. Adjust the desired mode byturning the TUNE knob.The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe TUNE knob. The mode changesfrom BAS to TRE to FAd to BAL,and then back to the selected audiomode, each time you press theTUNE knob.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAd adjusts the front-to-backstrength. CONTINUED

Audio System


Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

159

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBBAAddjjuussttmmeenntt LLeevveell

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theTUNE knob.

Select BAL or FAd by pressing theTUNE knob. Adjust the Balance orFader to your liking by turning theTUNE knob.The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Your Honda’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

77

Audio System


Audio System Lighting Radio Frequencies

160

CONTINUED

How well your Honda’s radioreceives stations is dependent onmany factors, such as the distancefrom the station’s transmitter,nearby large objects, and atmos-pheric conditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Audio System


Radio Reception

161

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

The audio system display usuallyshows the time when the ignitionswitch is in ACCESSORY (I) or ON(II). It shows the operation mode ofthe radio, cassette player, or CDchanger when you operate them,then goes back to the time displayafter five seconds.

If an error occurs while operatingthe CD changer, the display willkeep showing the error code and willnot switch to the time display untilthe error is corrected (see page ).

You can set the time only when theclock is displayed.

177

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Audio System


Digital Clock

162

Press and hold the H (Preset 4)button until the hour advances to thedesired time.

Press and hold the M (Preset 5)button until the minutes advance tothe desired time.

Press the CLOCK (FM) button againto enter the set time.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, the clock is setback to the previous hour bypressing the CLOCK (FM) buttonuntil you hear a beep, then pressingthe RESET (Preset 6) button. If thedisplayed time is after the half hour,the clock is set forward to thebeginning of the next hour.

For example:1:06 would RESET to 1:001:52 would RESET to 2:00

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the timesetting will be lost. To set the timeagain, follow the setting procedure.

To set the time, press the CLOCK(FM) button until you hear a beep.The displayed time begins to blink.

Audio System


CCLLOOCCKK BBUUTTTTOONN HH BBUUTTTTOONN MM BBUUTTTTOONN RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN

▲

You can remove the cassette withthe ignition switch in any position,even if the audio system is turned off.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

To switch to the radio or CDchanger while listening to a tape,press the AM, FM or CD button. Tochange back to the cassette player,press the TAPE button.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. The indi-cator will light in the display. If thetape was not recorded with Dolbynoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the button.

Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the buttonagain.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

Audio System


Operating the Cassette Player

164

－

CONTINUED

With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

Fast Forward andRewind move the tape rapidly. Torewind the tape, push the REWbutton. You will see REW in thedisplay. To fast forward the tape,push the FF button. You will see FFdisplayed. Press the FF, REW orPLAY button to take the system outof rewind or fast forward. When thesystem reaches the end of the tape,it reverses direction and begins toplay.

Tape Search Functions

FF/REW

Audio System


PPLLAAYYBBUUTTTTOONN DDOOLLBBYY BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN

FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

TTAAPPEEBBUUTTTTOONN

PPWWRR//VVOOLLKKNNOOBB

PPRROOGG BBUUTTTTOONN

FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWWBBUUTTTTOONN

TTAAPPEE DDIIRREECCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR TTAAPPEE EEJJEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONN

AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN

DDOOLLBBYY IINNDDIICCAATTOORRCCAASSSSEETTTTEE SSLLOOTT

－

○

○

○ ○

－

＋

－＋

The SKIP function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To skip to the beginningof a song or passage currentlyplaying, push the button. You willsee REW flashing in the display asthe tape rewinds. To skip to thebeginning of the next song, push the

button. You will see FF flashing inthe display as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds the begin-ning of a song or passage, it goesback to PLAY.

To stop the SKIP function before itfinds the beginning of a song orpassage, press either of the SKIPbuttons ( or ).

Audio System


SKIP

166

RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR


FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN

RRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN

－ The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.Pressing the REW or FF button, oreither of the SKIP buttons, also turnsoff REPEAT.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Audio System


REPEAT

167

The cassette player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. This contami-nation builds up over time andcauses the sound quality to degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.Your dealer has a cleaning kitavailable.

If you do not clean the cassetteplayer regularly, it may eventuallybecome impossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.Cassettes longer than that usethinner tape that may break or jamthe drive.

Look at the cassette before youinsert it. If the tape is loose, tightenit by turning a hub with a pencil oryour finger.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the cassette player.

When they are not in use, storecassettes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace cassettes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a cassette isexposed to extreme heat or cold, letit reach a moderate temperaturebefore inserting it in the player.

If the label is peeling off, remove itfrom the cassette or it could causethe cassette to jam in the player.Never try to insert a warped ordamaged cassette in the player.

If you see the error indication‘‘ ’’ on U.S. EX, and CanadianEX and EX-L models/‘‘ ’’ onLX model on the display, press theTAPE EJECT button to remove thecassette from the unit. Make surethe tape is not damaged. If thecassette will not eject or the errorindication stays on after the cassetteejects, take the vehicle to yourHonda dealer.

Audio System


Caring for the Cassette Player

168

To load the CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

Load and play only standard rounddiscs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam inthe drive or cause other problems.You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

Your Honda’s audio system has anin-dash CD changer that holds up tosix discs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio andcassette player.

For best results when using CD-Rdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R, the recordingmust be closed in order for the discto be used by CD players. CD-RWdiscs will not work in this unit. CONTINUED

Operating the CD Changer

Audio System


RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN

LLOOAADD BBUUTTTTOONN

PPWWRR//VVOOLLKKNNOOBB

CCDD EEJJEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD SSLLOOTT

RRDDMM BBUUTTTTOONN CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN SSKKIIPP BBUUTTTTOONNSS

To load multiple CDs in oneoperation:

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, press the Load buttonagain after the last CD has loaded.The system will begin playing thelast CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, and you do notpress the Load button, the systemwill wait for ten seconds, then stopthe load operation and begin playingthe last CD loaded.

To load a single CD:

Press and release the Load button.

Press and hold the Load buttonuntil you hear a beep and see‘‘LOAd’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

On the upper left side of thedisplay, the disc number for anempty position will begin blinkingand the green CD Loadedindicator will come on.

The disc number for an emptyposition starts to blink and thegreen CD Loaded indicator comeson. When you see LOAd in thedisplay, insert the disc into the CDslot. Insert it only about halfway,the drive will pull it in the rest ofthe way.

When LOAd appears again in thedisplay, insert the next disc intothe CD slot.

Insert the disc into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway, thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see BUSY in thedisplay. The CD loaded indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

The system will load the CD, andbegin playing it.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

Loading CDs in the Changer

Audio System


If you press the Load button while aCD is playing, the system will stopplaying that CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate presetbutton. Select an empty position (thedisc number indicator is off), andpress the preset button for thatposition (1 to 6). The system willstop playing the current CD and startthe loading sequence. It will thenplay the CD just loaded.

CONTINUED

Audio System


CCDD SSLLOOTT


DDIISSCC NNUUMMBBEERR

CCDD LLOOAADDEEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN

FFMMBBUUTTTTOONN

AAMMBBUUTTTTOONN

LLOOAADD BBUUTTTTOONN

－

－

－○

○

○

○

＋

－

＋

－

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe CD changer is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate Preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty position in theCD changer, the system will go intothe loading sequence (see page ).

You can use the SKIP buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay as a reminder. The systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing either of theSKIP buttons also turns off therepeat feature.

This feature,when activated, plays the trackswithin a CD in random order, ratherthan in the order they are recordedon the CD. To activate Random Play,press the RDM button. You will seeRDM in the display. The system willthen select and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again, or you select adifferent CD with a preset button.

Each time you press the buttonand release it, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release thebutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressand release it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

Select the CD changer by pressingthe CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ inthe display. The system will beginplaying the last selected disc in theCD changer. You will see the discand track numbers displayed.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the appropriate SKIPbutton. Press the button to moveforward. You will see CUE displayed.To move backward, press thebutton. You will see REW displayed.Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

170

Operation REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

Audio System


To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM or FM button, or inserta cassette in the player. If a tape isalready in the cassette player, pressthe TAPE button. When you returnto CD mode by pressing the CDbutton, play will continue at the samepoint that it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.

CONTINUED

Audio System


RRDDMMBBUUTTTTOONN

SSKKIIPPBBUUTTTTOONNSS

RRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN

FFMMBBUUTTTTOONN

AAMMBBUUTTTTOONN

TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN

RRPPTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORRPPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

CCDDBBUUTTTTOONN

RRDDMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR


If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 15 seconds and put the CDchanger in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button. When thatCD begins playing, press the Ejectbutton.

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the Eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the display. Whenyou remove the disc from the slot,the system automatically begins theLoad sequence so you can loadanother CD in that position. If you donot load another CD, the systemgoes back to the time display. If youselected radio or tape mode beforeremoving the disc, the systemselects the previous mode (AM, FM,or Tape).

Removing CDs from the Changer


Audio System

174

CCDD SSLLOOTT CCDD EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN

If you press the Eject button whilelistening to the radio or tape, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe Eject button again will eject thenext disc in the numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the CDs from the changer.

In any mode, if you press the Ejectbutton and hold it until you hear abeep, the system will eject all of thediscs in the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first. Youcan eject up to six discs, one at atime.

Audio System


When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the disc, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These and contamination fromfingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip penscan cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.


Audio System


IndicationIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

No CD in the CDchanger

Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs,check for error indication. Insert the CDs again.If the code does not disappear or the CD cannotbe pulled out, consult your Honda dealer.Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs,check for error indication. Insert the CD again.If the code does not disappear or the CD cannotbe pulled out, consult your Honda dealer.Insert CD magazine.

CD Changer Error Indications

Audio System


You will have to store your favoritestations in the Preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost whenpower was disconnected.

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, or the radiofuse is removed, the audio systemwill disable itself. If this happens,you will see ‘‘ ’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the Presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code. Ifit is entered correctly, the radio willstart playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over or try tocorrect your mistake. Complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on forone hour before trying again.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, the usermust enter a specific five-digit codein the Preset buttons. Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from fivedigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s codenumber and serial number. It is bestto store this card in a safe place athome. In addition, you should writethe audio system’s serial number inthis Owner’s Manual. If you shouldhappen to lose the card, you mustobtain the code number from yourHonda dealer. To do this, you willneed the system’s serial number.

Theft Protection

Audio System


Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Push in the Cruise Control MasterSwitch to the left of the steeringcolumn. The indicator in theswitch will light.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forconditions such as city driving,winding roads, slippery roads, heavyrain, or bad weather. You shouldhave full control of the vehicle underthose conditions.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control


Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRESUME/accel button. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Press and release the SET/decelbutton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

Press and hold the RESUME/accel button. The vehicle willaccelerate. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the SET/decelbutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RESUME/accel button repeatedly. Each timeyou do this, your vehicle will speedup about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).3.

Changing the Set Speed


Cruise Control

180

SSEETT//ddeecceell

RREESSUUMMEE//aacccceell

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal will cause the cruisecontrol to cancel.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Press the Cruise Control MasterSwitch.

Press and hold the SET/decelbutton. The vehicle will decelerate.Release the button when youreach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/decelbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your vehicle will slowdown about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/decel button. The vehicle will thenmaintain the desired speed.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

CONTINUED

Cancelling the Cruise Control

Cruise Control


CCAANNCCEELL BBUUTTTTOONN

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed from memory. To use thesystem again, refer to

.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, theCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out and thevehicle will begin to slow down. Youcan use the accelerator pedal in thenormal way.

The system remembers thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressthe RESUME/accel button. TheCRUISE CONTROL light comes on,and the vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Cruise Control


Using theCruise Control

182

Before you begin driving your Honda,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your vehicle,please read the information in thissection first.

.............................Break-in Period . 184.........................................Gasoline . 184

.........Service Station Procedures . 185................Filling the Fuel Tank . 185

....................Opening the Hood . 186...............................Oil Check . 188

.........Engine Coolant Check . 189...............................Fuel Economy . 190

.....................Vehicle Condition . 190...........................Driving Habits . 190

...Accessories and Modifications . 191.............................Carrying Cargo . 193

Before Driving

Before Driving 183

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Your Honda is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 86 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise in the engine that can lead tomechanical damage.

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits.

Using gasoline containing lead willdamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols. This contributes to airpollution.

In Canada, some gasolines containan octane-enhancing additive calledMMT. If you use such gasolines,your emission control systemperformance may deteriorate andthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on.If this happens, contact yourauthorized Honda dealer for service.

You should follow these same re-commendations with an overhauledor exchanged engine, or when thebrakes are relined.

Do not change the oil until therecommended time or mileageinterval shown in the maintenanceschedule.

Avoid hard braking. New brakesneed to be broken-in by moderateuse for the first 200 miles (300km).

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Break-in Period, Gasoline

Before Driving

Break-in Period Gasoline

184

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Because the fuel fill cap is on thedriver’s side of the vehicle, parkwith that side closest to theservice station pumps.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.

Your vehicle has an on-boardrefueling vapor recovery system tohelp keep fuel vapors from goinginto the atmosphere. If the fuelnozzle keeps clicking off eventhough the tank is not full, theremay be a problem with this system.Consult your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Filling the Fuel Tank

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving 185

PPuullll

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL CCAAPP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Shift to Park or Neutral and setthe parking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on,tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. If you do not properlytighten the cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp may come on (seepage ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Standing in front of the vehicle,put your fingers between the frontedge of the hood and the frontgrille. The hood latch handle isabove the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push thishandle up until it releases thehood. Lift the hood.

1. 2.

5.

6.

327


Before Driving

Opening the Hood

186

LLAATTCCHH

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE

If you can open the hood withoutlifting the hood latch handle, or thehood latch handle moves stiffly ordoes not spring back as before, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated (see page ).

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop.

After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

Pull the support rod out of its clipand insert the end into the hole inthe hood.

3.

266

CONTINUED


Before Driving 187

SSUUPPPPOORRTT RROODD

CCLLIIPP

Check the engine oil level every timeyou fill the vehicle with fuel. Wait afew minutes after turning the engineoff before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its tube.2.

1.

3.

Oil Check


Before Driving188

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

on checking other items in yourHonda.

4.

245

247

251


Before Driving

Adding Oil

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Engine Coolant Check

189

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK

LLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK

MMAAXX

MMIINN

Always maintain your vehicle accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.This will keep it in top operatingcondition.

You can improve fuel economy bydriving moderately. Rapid acceler-ation, abrupt cornering, and hardbraking use more fuel.

The condition of your vehicle andyour driving habits are the two mostimportant things that affect the fuelmileage you get.

A cold engine uses more fuel than awarm engine. It is not necessary to‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting itidle for a long time. You can driveaway in about a minute, no matterhow cold it is outside. The enginewill warm up faster, and you getbetter fuel economy. To cut down onthe number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try tocombine several short trips into one.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Turn off the A/C tocut down on air conditioning use.Use the flow-through ventilationwhen the outside air temperature ismoderate.

Always drive in the highest gear thatallows the engine to run and acceler-ate smoothly.

In winter, the build-up of snow onyour vehicle’s underside adds weightand rolling resistance. Frequentcleaning helps your fuel mileage andreduces the chance of corrosion.

Depending on traffic conditions, tryto maintain a constant speed. Everytime you slow down and speed up,your vehicle uses extra fuel. Use thecruise control, when appropriate, toincrease fuel economy.

An important part of that mainte-nance is the

(see page ). Forexample, an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses fuel. It also wears outfaster, so check the tire pressure atleast monthly.

245

Vehicle Condition

Driving Habits

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Fuel Economy

Before Driving190

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer-controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Non-Honda accessories are usuallydesigned for universal applications.Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability. (See‘‘Modifications’’ on page foradditional information.) If possible, have your dealer inspect

the final installation.

Have the installer contact yourHonda dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ).

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Before installing any accessory:

However, if electronic accessoriesare improperly installed, or exceedyour vehicle’s electrical systemcapacity, they can interfere with theoperation of your vehicle, or evencause the airbags to deploy.

192

331

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving 191

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Do not remove any originalequipment or modify your vehicle inany way that would alter its design oroperation. This could make yourvehicle unsafe and illegal to drive.

Such modifications can adverselyaffect handling, and interfere withthe operation of the vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and other systems.

In addition, any modifications thatdecrease ground clearance increasethe chance of undercarriage partsstriking a curb, speed bump, or otherraised object, which could causeyour airbags to deploy.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective.

For example, do not make anymodifications that would change theride height of your vehicle, or installwheels and tires with a differentoverall diameter.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Covering the outside edge of afront seat-back, with a non-Hondaseat cover for example, couldprevent the airbag from inflatingproperly.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thevehicle and hurt someone.


Modifications

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not place any objects over theoutside edge of a front seat-back.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving192

＊＊

＊＊

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas so you can stow cargosafely.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability, andoperation and make it unsafe. Beforecarrying any type of cargo, be sure toread the following pages.

The glove box, and the pockets inthe doors and seat-backs, aredesigned for small, lightweight items.The cargo area is intended for larger,heavier items. In addition, the backseats can be folded to allow you tocarry more cargo or longer items.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 193

SSTTOORRAAGGEE BBOOXX

DDOOOORR PPOOCCKKEETTSSTTAAIILLGGAATTEE PPOOCCKKEETTSS

CCAARRGGOO UUNNDDEERR--FFLLOOOORR SSTTOORRAAGGEE

DDAASSHHBBOOAARRDD PPOOCCKKEETT

CCAARRGGOO AARREEAA SSEEAATT--BBAACCKKPPOOCCKKEETTSS

GGLLOOVVEE BBOOXXCCEENNTTEERR PPOOCCKKEETT

AA//TT mmooddeell oonnllyy

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, or with the properoperation of the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If the lid is open, apassenger could injure their kneesduring a crash or sudden stop.

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs in U.S. models and 395 kgin Canadian models.

The final number is the total weightof cargo you can carry.

Subtract the total from 850 lbs inU.S. models and 395 kg inCanadian models.

If you are towing a trailer, add thetongue weight to the numberabove.

Add up the weight of all occupants.

To figure out how much cargo youcan carry:

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, accessories,and the tongue weight if you aretowing a trailer.

When you load luggage, the totalweight of the vehicle, all passengers,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). The loadfor the front and rear axles also mustnot exceed the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). The GVWR andGAWR are printed on the tireinformation label attached to thedriver’s doorjamb (see page ).218

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Load Limit

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving194

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate or the hatch glass, exhaustgas can enter the passenger area.To avoid the possibility of

, follow theinstructions on page .

If you can carry any items on aroof rack, be sure the total weightof the rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your Hondadealer for further information.

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

To secure cargo, use the four floorhooks in the cargo area. Make sureall stored items are secured beforedriving.60

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Rack

carbonmonoxide poisoning

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 195

HHOOOOKKSS

Store only small, lightweight items inthe pockets on the back of thetailgate.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

Tailgate Pockets

196

TTAAIILLGGAATTEE PPOOCCKKEETTSS

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate the5-speed manual and automatictransmissions. It also includesimportant information on parkingyour vehicle, the braking system,and facts you need if you are plan-ning to tow a trailer or drive off-highway.

........................Driving Guidelines . 198

........................Preparing to Drive . 199.......................Starting the Engine . 200

Starting in Cold Weather....................at High Altitude . 201

....5-speed Manual Transmission . 202.....Recommended Shift Points . 203

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 203

..............Automatic Transmission . 204.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 204

................Shift Lever Positions . 205..............Engine Speed Limiter . 208

....................Shift Lock Release . 209...........................................Parking . 210

.....................The Braking System . 211.............Brake Wear Indicators . 211

...............Brake System Design . 212.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 212

Important Safety.........................Reminders . 213........................ABS Indicator . 214

...............Driving in Bad Weather . 215...........................Towing a Trailer . 217

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a................................Motorhome . 224

..............Off-Highway Guidelines . 226.................General Information . 226

Important Safety............................Precautions . 227

...............................Driving Tips . 228

Driving

Driving 197

Your CR-V has higher groundclearance than a passenger vehicledesigned only for use on pavement.Higher ground clearance has manyadvantages for off-highway driving.It allows you to travel over bumpsand unpaved roads. It also providesgood visibility so you can anticipateproblems earlier.

These advantages come at some cost.Because your vehicle is taller andrides higher off the ground, it has ahigh center of gravity. This meansthat your vehicle can tip or roll overif you make abrupt turns. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types ofvehicles.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers whenever possible.

Do not modify your vehicle in anyway that would raise the center ofgravity.

Do not carry heavy cargo on theroof.

Your CR-V is equipped with a uniquefour-wheel drive (4WD) system.Normally, power is delivered only tothe front wheels. When the systemsenses a loss of front-wheel traction,it automatically transfers somepower to the rear wheels. This givesyou better traction and mobility.

While this system can provideincreased traction on slipperysurfaces, you still need to exercisethe same care when accelerating,steering, and braking that you wouldin a two-wheel drive vehicle.

To prevent the risk of rollover orloss of control:

Take corners at slower speedsthan you would with a passengervehicle.

See page for additional guidelinesfor driving off-highway.

Four-wheel Drive Models

226

Driving Guidelines

Driving198

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check the adjustment of the seat(see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of thesteering wheel (see page ).

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).Check the indicator lights in theinstrument panel.

Start the engine (see page ).

Check the gauges and indicatorlights in the instrument panel (seepage ).

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying with you inside are storedproperly or fastened downsecurely.

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Check that the hood, tailgate andhatch glass are fully closed.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

97

114

83

17

200

65

Driving

Preparing to Drive

199

If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting in order to clear flooding.As before, keep the ignition key inthe START (III) position for nomore than 15 seconds. Return tostep 5 if the engine does not start.If it starts, lift your foot off theaccelerator pedal so the enginedoes not race.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed half-waydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. If the enginedoes not start right away, do nothold the key in START (III) formore than 15 seconds at a time.Pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway. START (III) does notfunction unless the clutch pedal isdepressed.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Driving

Starting the Engine

200

An engine is harder to start in coldweather. The thinner air found athigh altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400meters) adds to the problem.Use the following procedure:

Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

Push the accelerator pedal half-way to the floor and hold it therewhile starting the engine. Do nothold the ignition key in START(III) for more than 15 seconds.When the engine starts, releasethe accelerator pedal gradually asthe engine speeds up and smoothsout.

If the engine fails to start in step 2,push the accelerator pedal to thefloor and hold it there while youtry to start the engine for no morethan 15 seconds. If the enginedoes not start, return to step 2.

3.

2.

1.

Starting in Cold Weather at HighAltitude (Above 8,000 feet/2,400 meters)

Starting the Engine

Driving 201

The manual transmission is syn-chronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from Fifthto Reverse. When shifting up ordown, make sure you push the clutchpedal down all the way, shift to thenext gear, and let the pedal upgradually. When you are not shifting,do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal. This can cause your clutch towear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into Reverse, or shift intoone of the forward gears for amoment. This stops the gears sothey won’t ‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure engine speed will not gointo the tachometer’s red zone in thelower gear.

5-speed Manual Transmission

Driving202

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effective emis-sions control. The following shiftpoints are recommended:

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (64 km/h)48 mph (77 km/h)

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Driving

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

5-speed Manual Transmission

203

Your Honda’s transmission has fourforward speeds, and is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting. Italso has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converterfor better fuel economy. You mayfeel what seems like another shiftwhen the converter locks.

This indicator on the instrumentpanel shows which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). If it flasheswhile driving (in any shift position),it indicates a possible problem in thetransmission. Avoid rapid accelera-tion and have the transmissionchecked by an authorized Hondadealer as soon as possible.

The malfunction indicator lamp maycome on along with the ‘‘D’’ indicatorif there is a problem in the automatictransmission control system.

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Driving

Automatic Transmission

204

－

CONTINUED

The shift lever has six positions. Itmust be in Park or Neutral to startthe engine. When you are stopped inD, 2, 1, N or R, press firmly on thebrake pedal, and keep your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

You cannot shift out of Park with thebrake pedal depressed when theignition switch is in LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I).

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Move the shiftlever to the left and down to shift outof the Park positon.

To shift from:P to R

R to NN to DD to 22 to 11 to 22 to DD to NN to RR to P

Do this:Press the brake pedal, thenmove the shift lever.

Move the lever.


Driving

Shift Lever Positions

Park (P)

205

SSHHIIFFTT LLEEVVEERR

－

－

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to Park posi-tion if you need to leave the vehiclefor any reason. Press on the brake pe-dal when you are moving the shiftlever from Neutral to another gear.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release on page

.

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

To shift to Reversefrom Park, see the explanation underPark. To shift to Reverse fromNeutral, come to a complete stop andthen shift.

Your vehicle has a reverse lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift toReverse when the vehicle speedexceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).

If you cannot shift to Reverse whenthe vehicle is stopped, press thebrake pedal and slowly shift toNeutral, and then to Reverse.

If there is a problem in the reverselockout system, or your vehicle’sbattery is disconnected or goes dead,you cannot shift to Reverse. (Referto Shift Lock Release on page ).

209

209

Neutral (N)

Reverse (R)


Driving206

－ Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitablegear for your speed and acceleration.You may notice the transmissionshifting up at higher speeds whenthe engine is cold. This helps theengine warm up faster.

For faster acceleration, you can getthe transmission to automaticallydownshift by pushing the acceleratorpedal to the floor. The transmissionwill shift down one or two gears,depending on your speed. Over drive (O/D) is on whenever

you turn the ignition ON (II). Youcan turn it off by pressing the O/Dswitch on the end of the shift lever.The O/D OFF indicator on theinstrument panel next to the shiftlever ‘‘D’’ position indicator will comeon.

Pressing the O/D switch again turnsthe Over Drive mode back on.Over drive can be turned on or offonly when the ignition switch is ON(II) and the shift lever is in the Dposition. Over Drive mode turns onevery time you start the engine, evenif you turned it off the last time youdrove the vehicle.

CONTINUED


Driving

Drive (D) Over drive (O/D) Mode

207

OOVVEERR DDRRIIVVEE OOFFFF IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

－

－

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

When the Over Drive is off, thetransmission selects only the firstthree gears. Turn the O/D off toprovide engine braking when goingdown a steep hill. You can also avoidthe transmission from cyclingbetween third and fourth gears instop-and-go driving.

The O/D OFF indicator also comeson for a few seconds when you turnthe ignition switch to ON(II).

This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop. Secondgives you more power when climbing,and increased engine braking whengoing down steep hills. Use secondgear when starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow. It will helpreduce wheelspin.

With the lever in thisposition, the transmission locks inFirst gear. By upshifting anddownshifting through 1, 2, and D,you can operate this transmissionmuch like a manual transmissionwithout a clutch pedal.

If you shift into First position whenthe vehicle speed is above 31 mph(50 km/h), the transmission shiftsinto Second gear first to avoidsudden engine braking.

Engine Speed LimiterSecond (2)

First (1)


Driving208

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal does not work. This procedureis also used to release the ReverseLockout.

Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever.Use a small flat-tipped screwdriveror small metal plate (neither areincluded in the tool kit) to removethe cover. Carefully pry on theedge of the cover.

To release the Reverse Lockout,make sure the ignition switch is inthe ACCESSORY(I) position.

Make sure the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) position.

Set the Parking brake.

Insert a screwdriver in the ShiftLock Release slot.

Push down on the screwdriver andmove the shift lever out of Park toNeutral.

To release the Reverse Lockout,move the shift lever from Neutralto Reverse, then to Park.

Remove the Screwdriver from theShift Lock Release slot, theninstall a new cover. Make sure thenotch on the cover is on the rightside. Depress the brake pedal andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your Hondadealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Shift Lock Release


Driving 209

SSHHIIFFTT LLOOCCKK RREELLEEAASSEE SSLLOOTT

CCOOVVEERR

－

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. The indicatoron the instrument panel shows thatthe parking brake is not fullyreleased; it does not indicate that theparking brake is firmly set. Makesure the parking brake is set firmlyor your vehicle may roll if it isparked on an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission making it easier tomove the shift lever out of Parkwhen you want to drive away.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from the curb.If you have a manual transmission,put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill, turnthe front wheels toward the curb. Ifyou have a manual transmission, putit in reverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat or damagethe rear brakes.

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Lock the doors and the tailgatewith the key or the remotetransmitter.Make sure the hatch glass isclosed securely.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the cargo area or take themwith you.

Turn off the lights.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The three way catalyticconverter gets very hot, and couldcause these materials to catch onfire.

Parking Tips

Driving

Parking

210

When the brake pads need replacing,you will hear a distinctive metallic‘‘screeching’’ sound when you applythe brakes. If you do not have thebrake pads replaced, they will beginscreeching all the time.

Your brakes may sometimes squealor squeak when you apply themlightly. Do not confuse this with thebrake wear indicators. They make avery audible ‘‘screeching.’’

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by downshifting to a lowergear and taking your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Since alonger distance is needed to stopwith wet brakes, be extra cautiousand alert in your driving.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, causing themto build up heat. Heat build-up canreduce how well your brakes work. Italso keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Your Honda is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS (onvehicles equipped with ABS) helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

All four brakes have audible brakewear indicators.

Brake Wear Indicators

The Braking System

Driving 211

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

When the front tires skid, you losesteering control; the vehiclecontinues straight ahead eventhough you turn the steering wheel.The ABS helps to prevent lock-upand helps you retain steering controlby pumping the brakes rapidly; muchfaster than a person can do it.

ABS helps to prevent the wheelsfrom locking up and skidding duringhard braking, allowing you to retainsteering control.

The ABS also balances the front-torear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.

Standard for EX model in the U.S., andEX and EX-L models in Canada

Brake System Design Anti-lock Brakes

The Braking System

Driving212

FFrroonntt

this defeats thepurpose of the ABS. Let the ABSwork for you by always keeping firm,steady pressure on the brake pedalas you steer away from the hazard.This is sometimes referred to as

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal; it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes.

Activation varies with the amount oftraction your tires have. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before youactivate the ABS. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

it only helps with steeringcontrol during braking. You shouldalways maintain a safe followingdistance from other vehicles.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safe,prudent speed for the road andweather conditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

‘‘stomp and steer.’’

CONTINUED

You should never pump thebrake pedal; ABS does not reduce the time or

distance it takes to stop thevehicle,

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Important Safety Reminders

The Braking System

Driving 213

＊＊

＊＊

The ABS is self-checking. If anythinggoes wrong, the ABS indicator onthe instrument panel comes on (seepage ). This means the anti-lockfunction of the braking system hasshut down. The brakes still work likea conventional system without anti-lock, providing normal stoppingability. You should have the dealerinspect your vehicle as soon aspossible.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also shutdown.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

68

329

ABS Indicator

The Braking System

Driving214

AABBSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn

－－Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your vehicle longerto react, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few miles(kilometers) of driving while youadjust to the change in drivingconditions. This is especially true insnow. A person can forget somesnow-driving techniques during thesummer months. Practice is neededto relearn those skills.

Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long dry spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Inspect your windshield wipers andwashers frequently. Keep the wind-shield washer reservoir full of theproper fluid. Have the windshieldwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windshield or leave partsunwiped. Use the defrosters and airconditioning to keep the windowsfrom fogging up on the inside (seepage ).

Rain, fog, and snow conditions re-quire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your vehicle well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise controlshould not be used in these condi-tions.

134

CONTINUED

Driving Technique Visibility

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving 215

－ Check your tiresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tires on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.

Traction

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving216

Your Honda has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetrailer weight. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control.

The totalweight of the trailer andeverything loaded in it must notexceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg). Towinga load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

CONTINUED

Tongue Load:

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight:

Towing a Trailer

Driving 217

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, thetongue load must not exceed:

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

on the front axle

on the rear axleand

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Towing a Trailer

Driving218

4,320 lbs (1,960 kg)

2,160 lbs (980 kg)

2,250 lbs (1,020 kg)

Exceeding load limits orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriouslyinjured or killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, andhow much load you are towing.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Always use safety chains. Make surethey are secured to both the trailerand hitch, and that they cross underthe tongue so they can catch thetrailer if it becomes unhitched.Leave enough slack to allow thetrailer to turn corners easily, but donot let the chains drag on the ground.

CONTINUED

Checking Loads Towing Equipment andAccessories

Hitches

Safety Chains

Towing a Trailer

Driving 219

Honda recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

Your vehicle has a trailer lightingconnector located behind the leftside panel in the cargo area. Refer tothe drawing above for the wiringcolor code and purpose of each pin.

All states and Canadian provincesrequire some type of trailer lights.Check requirements for the areaswhere you plan to tow.

If you use a converter, you can getthe connector and pins that matewith the connector in your vehiclefrom your Honda dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary intrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights

Towing a Trailer

Driving220

GGRROOUUNNDD((BBLLAACCKK))

RRIIGGHHTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL((GGRREEEENN//YYEELLLLOOWW))

LLEEFFTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL((GGRREEEENN//RREEDD))

TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTT((RREEDD//YYEELLLLOOWW))

BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTT((WWHHIITTEE//BBLLAACCKK))

BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTT((GGRREEEENN//BBLLAACCKK))

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, and cooling systemare in good operating condition.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

If you tow frequently, follow theSevere Conditions maintenanceschedule.

217 218

278

Additional Trailer Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist

Towing a Trailer

Driving 221

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesdiscussed below.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently between 3rd and 4thgears while going up a hill, turn offthe Over drive (O/D) mode (seepage ).

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use the Over drive(O/D) mode when towing a traileron level roads. Turn off the Overdrive (O/D) mode when towing atrailer in hilly terrain (see page ).(See ‘‘ ’’ in the nextcolumn for additional gearinformation.)

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

207

207

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Driving on Hills

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Towing Speeds and Gears

222

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to 3rdgear on the manual transmission,and turn off the Over drive (O/D)mode on the automatic transmission.Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

bottom

Parking

Backing Up

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Driving

Towing a Trailer

223

When preparing to tow your CR-V,make sure the transmission isfilled to the correct level (see page

). Do not overfill.

Leave the key in the ignitionswitch and the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) so the steeringwheel does not lock. Make surethe radio and any items pluggedinto the accessory power socketsare turned off so you do not rundown the battery.

Shift the transmission to Neutral.

Release the parking brake.

After attaching the tow bar to yourmotorhome, do the following toprepare your CR-V for ‘‘flat towing’’:

When purchasing a tow bar, makesure you select a reputablemanufacturer and installer. Followthe manufacturer’s attachmentinstructions carefully.

Your CR-V can be towed behind amotorhome at legal highway speedsup to 65 mph(100 km/h). Do notexceed 65 mph(100km/h).Otherwise, severe transmissiondamege will occur. To avoid damageto the 4WD system, it must be towedwith all four wheels on the ground(flat towing).

When preparing to tow your CR-V,make sure the transmission is full offluid (see page ). Maintainingthe correct level is very important.Do not overfill. Do the following

Follow the procedure exactly.Otherwise, severe automatictransmission damage will occur.

261260

every day immediately before you begintowing.

5-speed Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

Driving224

Start the engine.

Press on the brake pedal. Shift thelever through all the positions (P,R, N, D, 2, 1)

Shift to D, then to N. Let theengine run for three minutes, thenturn off the engine.

Release the parking brake.

Leave the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) so the steeringwheel does not lock. Make surethe radio and any items pluggedinto the accessory power socketsare turned off so you do not rundown the battery.

If you tow more than 8 hours in oneday, you should repeat the aboveprocedure at least every 8 hours.(when you stop for fuel, etc.)

If you tow a CR-V with an automatictransmission, the transmission fluidmust be changed every two years or30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichevercomes first.

Extended Towing

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

Driving 225

Failure to f ollow the above instructionsexactly will result in severe automatictransmission damage. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine, your vehicle must betransported on a f lat-bed truck ortrailer.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in Accessory (I), andmake sure the steering wheel turnsf reely bef ore you begin towing.

Severe automatic transmission damagewill occur if the vehicle is shif ted f romreverse to neutral and then towed withthe drive wheels on the ground.

Your CR-V has been designedprimarily for use on pavement. Butits higher ground clearance allowsyou to occasionally travel on unpavedroads, to campgrounds, picnic sites,and similar locations. It is notdesigned for trailblazing, mountainclimbing, or other challenging off-road activities.

If you decide to drive on unpavedroads, you will find that it requiressomewhat different driving skills.Your CR-V will also handlesomewhat differently than it does onpavement. So be sure to read thisowner’s manual, pay special attentionto the precautions and tips in thissection, and get acquainted withyour vehicle before you leave thepavement.

General Information

Off-Highway Guidelines

Driving226

Remember that your CR-V hashigher ground clearance and ahigher center of gravity thanpassenger vehicles designed for useonly on pavement. This means yourvehicle can more easily tip or rollover if you make abrupt turns ordrive on slopes.

Utility vehicles have a significantlyhigher rollover rate than other typesof vehicles. To avoid loss of controlor rollover, be sure to follow allrecommendations and precautionson page and in this section.

Seat belts are just as important off-road as on paved roads. Whereveryou drive, make sure you and yourpassengers always wear seat belts. Ifchildren or infants are along for theride, see that they are properlysecured. In a rollover crash, anunbelted person is more likely to diethan a person wearing a seat belt.

On many unpaved roads, you won’tfind lane markers, traffic signals, orsigns to warn you of possible troubleahead. It’s up to you to continuallyassess the situation and drive withinlimits.

The route presents limits (someroads are too steep and bumpy forexample). You have limits (in drivingskills and comfort). And your vehiclealso has limits (traction, stability, andpower, for instance).

Driving off-highway can behazardous if you fail to recognizelimits and take proper precautions.For example, you can have anaccident or rollover duringmaneuvers such as turning, drivingon hills, or over large obstacles.

Be sure to store cargo properly, anddo not exceed your CR-V’s cargo ortrailer load limits (see pages and

).194

198

217



Driving 227

Improperly operating thisvehicle on or off-pavement cancause an accident or rollover inwhich you and your passengerscould be seriously injured orkilled.

Follow all instructions andguidelines in the owner’smanual.Keep your speed low anddon’t drive faster thanconditions permit.

After you return to the pavement,carefully inspect your vehicle tomake sure there is no damage thatcould make driving it unsafe. Checkthe tires for damage and for properpressure.

Driving off-highway can be hard on avehicle. Before you leave thepavement, be sure all scheduledmaintenance and service has beendone, and that you have inspectedyour vehicle. Pay special attention tothe condition of the tires, and use agauge to check the tire pressures.

The following pages contain practicaltips on basic off-highway operation.

Off-highway, the general rule is tokeep your speed low. Of course,you’ll need enough speed to keepmoving forward. But at higherspeeds, you have less time to assessconditions and make good decisions.There’s also a greater chance ofsliding if you brake or turn tooquickly on wet soil, gravel, or ice. Inany situation, never go faster thanconditions allow.

For better traction on all surfaces,accelerate slowly and gradually buildup speed. If you try to start too faston wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, youmight not have enough traction toget underway. You may even digyourself into a hole. Starting with theshift lever in second gear (2) willhelp get you to a smooth start onsnow and ice.

Generally, the best off-pavementbraking technique is to gentlydepress the brake pedal, thenincrease pressure as more braking isneeded. Avoid hard braking. Keep inmind that you will usually need moretime and distance to brake to a stopon unpaved surfaces.

If you need to brake hard because ofan emergency, apply steady, evenpressure to the brake pedal. Do notpump the brakes; let the anti-lockbraking system pump them for you.If you pump the brakes, the anti-lockcannot work as efficiently, and yourstopping distance may be increased.

With ABS

Driving Tips

Check Out Your Vehicle

Controlling Speed

Accelerating and Braking


Driving228

Bumps, holes, rocks, and otherobstacles can be hazardous. Debrisin the road can damage yoursuspension or other components.Even small rocks can cut your tires.

More important, because yourvehicle has a high center of gravity,driving over a large obstacle, orallowing a wheel to drop into a deephole, can cause your vehicle to tip orroll over.

Drive slow enough to observeobstacles ahead and maneuveraround them. If you can’t avoid aserious obstacle, turn around andlook for a better route.

Before driving up or down a hill, stopand assess the situation. If you can’tclearly see all road conditions (goodtraction, no bumps, holes or otherobstacles, a safe way out, etc.) walkthe slope before you drive on it. Ifyou have any doubt about whetheryou can safely drive on the slope,

. Find another route.

If you are driving up a hill and findthat you cannot continue (because ofthe steepness, a large obstacle, etc.),

. Your vehiclecould roll over. Slowly back down thehill, following the same route youtook up the hill.

You should have no problem makingsharp turns at low speed on levelground. But never make an abruptturn at higher speeds, on or offpavement. With a higher center ofgravity, your vehicle can more easilytip or roll over.

Off-highway, the basic turningtechnique is to drive at low speedand gradually adjust the amount ofsteering to suit the surface.

Test your brakes from time to timeto make sure they are operatingproperly. This will also give you afeel for how much traction you haveon a given surface.

don’t do it

do not try to turn around

Avoiding ObstaclesDriving on Slopes


Driving

Turning

229

Avoid driving through deep water. Ifyou encounter water in your route (asmall stream or large puddle, forexample), evaluate it carefully beforegoing ahead. Make sure it is shallow,flowing slowly, and has firm groundunderneath. If you are not sure ofthe depth or the ground, turn aroundand find another route.

Driving through deep water can alsodamage your vehicle. The water canget into the transmission anddifferential, diluting the lubricantand causing an eventual failure. Itcan also wash the grease out of thewheel bearings.

You should never use a jack to trygetting unstuck. A jack only workson firm, level ground. Also, yourvehicle could easily slip off the jackand hurt you or someone else.

Avoid driving on soft sand, deep mud,or other surfaces where you couldget stuck. If you do happen to getstuck because of inclement weatheror other conditions, choose a safeand appropriate course of action.

If You Encounter Water

If You Get Stuck


Driving230

If you spin the wheels excessivelytrying to get unstuck, you mayoverheat the components of the4-wheel drive system. If this happens,the 4-wheel drive system shuts offand only the front wheels receivepower. If this happens, stop andallow everything to cool down. The4-wheel drive system will work againafter its temperature drops.

If you slip the clutch for a long timewhile trying to get unstuck, you mayoverheat and damage it.


Driving

4-Wheel Drive Vehicles

231

232

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Honda, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Hondadealer.

......................Maintenance Safety . 234.Important Safety Precautions . 235

.................Maintenance Schedule . 236

...Required Maintenance Record . 243.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 245

..............................Fluid Locations . 246......................................Engine Oil . 247

..................................Adding Oil . 247....................Recommended Oil . 247

..............................Synthetic Oil . 248....................................Additives . 248

.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 249.............................Cooling System . 251

............Adding Engine Coolant . 251.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 253

....................Windshield Washers . 258.......................Transmission Fluid . 260

..........Automatic Transmission . 2605-speed Manual

.........................Transmission . 261.................Rear Differential Fluid . 262................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 263

............................Brake System . 263...........................Clutch System . 264

..............................Power Steering . 264.....................Air Cleaner Element . 265

....................................Hood Latch . 266

....................................Spark Plugs . 267..............................Replacement . 267

............................Specifications . 268...........................................Battery . 269

.................................Wiper Blades . 271..............Air Conditioning System . 274

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 275.......................................Drive Belt . 277

...............................................Tires . 278......................................Inflation . 278

Recommended TirePressures for Normal

...........................Driving . 279Tire Pressure Adjustment for

..........High Speed Driving . 279..................................Inspection . 280

..............................Maintenance . 280.............................Tire Rotation . 281

...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 282......................Wheels and Tires . 283

..........................Winter Driving . 283.............................Snow Tires . 283............................Tire Chains . 284

.............................................Lights . 285.....................Headlight Aiming . 287

........................Replacing Bulbs . 287....................Storing Your Vehicle . 295

357

Maintenance

Maintenance 233

Regularly maintaining your vehicle isthe best way to protect yourinvestment. Proper maintenance isessential to your safety and thesafety of your passengers. It will alsoreward you with more economical,trouble-free driving and help reduceair pollution.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

This section includes instructions forsimple maintenance tasks, such aschecking and adding oil. Any serviceitems not detailed in this sectionshould be performed by a Hondatechnician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Maintenance

Maintenance Safety

234

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Before you begin any maintenance,make sure your vehicle is parked onlevel ground and that the parkingbrake is set. Also, be sure the engineis off. This will help to eliminateseveral potential hazards:

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unless in-structed to do so.

Read the instructions before youbegin, and make sure you have thetools and skills required.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, be careful when workingaround gasoline or batteries. Use acommercially available degreaser orparts cleaner, not gasoline, to cleanparts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, andflames away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

You should wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingnear the battery or when usingcompressed air.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance


Carbon monoxide poisoningfrom engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

235

－

The services and time or distanceintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule assume you will use yourvehicle as normal transportation forpassengers and their possessions.You should also follow theserecommendations:

The Maintenance Schedule specifieshow often you should have yourvehicle serviced and what thingsneed attention. It is essential thatyou have your vehicle serviced asscheduled to retain its high level ofsafety, dependability, and emissionscontrol performance.

Avoid exceeding your vehicle’sload limit. This puts excess stresson the engine, brakes, and manyother parts of your vehicle. Theload limit is shown on the label onthe driver’s doorjamb.

Operate your vehicle onreasonable roads within the legalspeed limit.

Drive your vehicle regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).

Service your vehicle according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions if you drive your vehicleMAINLY under one or more of thefollowing conditions.

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving less than 10miles (16 km) per trip.

Driving in extremely hot [over90°F (32°C)] conditions.

Extensive idling or long periods ofstop-and-go driving.

Trailer towing, driving with a roofrack, or driving in mountainousconditions.184

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Which Schedule to Follow:

U.S.Owners

236

＃

－

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Hondarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.

We recommend the use of genuineHonda parts and fluids whenever youhave maintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLYor NEVER, drive under a ‘‘severe’’condition, you should follow theMaintenance Schedule for NormalConditions.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions.

Maintenance

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance, replacement orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Canadian Owners

237

－

＊＃

＊

＃

＃

Maintenance238

Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

1016

5080

70112

110176

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

2032

3048

4064

6096

80128

100160

Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

120192

Service the following items at the recommended intervals.

Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km) or 7 yearsInspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy

Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)

90144

Check engine oil and coolantReplace engine oilRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)Replace engine oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentVisually inspect the following items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Inspect and adjust drive beltsReplace dust and pollen filterReplace transmission fluid

Replace rear differential fluid (4WD)

Replace air cleaner elementReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace brake fluid

24 48 7212 36 60

M/TA/T

237::

Maintenance

ScheduleforN

ormalConditions

－－

□□□□□□□□□□

□□□□□

□

□

□□□

□

□□

□

＃

＃

＃

Maintenance 239

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A, B, C, D

A

B

C

D

Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.

Replace engine oil.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 281 ).Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace dust and pollen filter.Replace air cleaner element every 30,000 mi/48,000km (independent of time).

10,000 mi/16,000 km/1 yr20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr30,000 mi/48,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs3 yrs50,000 mi/80,000 km/3 yrs60,000 mi/96,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs70,000 mi/112,000 km/4 yrs80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs

100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs110,000 mi/176,000 km

6 yrs110,000 mi/176,000 km/6 yrs110,000 mi/176,000 km/7 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in D.Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A.Do item in D.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in D.Do items in A, C.

Replace rear differential fluid (4WD).Do items in A, B.

Inspect valve clearance, cold engine.Replace spark plugs.Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).

Do items in A.Inspect idle speed.

Do item in D.Replace transmission fluid (M/T).Replace transmission fluid (A/T), then

replace every 90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs.Do items in A, B, C.

Replace engine coolant, then replace every60,000mi/96,000km/5yrs.

236

: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

NOTE:

237

Maintenance

Schedule

forNorm

alConditions

(listedby

distance/time)

－

＊＃

＃＃

＊

Maintenance240

Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

Replace every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsCheck oil and coolant at each fuel stop

1016

5080

70112

110176

At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

At 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles(48,000 km) or 2 years

2032

3048

4064

6096

80128

100160

120192

90144

Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km) or 7 yearsInspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy

Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)

Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) in dusty conditions,otherwise use normal schedule

Service the following items at the recommended intervals.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

Check engine oil and coolantReplace engine oilRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)Replace engine oil filterInspect front and rear brakesLubricate all hinges, locks, and latchesVisually inspect the following items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft boots

Check parking brake adjustmentVisually inspect the following items:

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust system, Fuel lines and connections

Lights and controls, Vehicle underbodyInspect and adjust drive beltsReplace dust and pollen filterReplace transmission fluid

Replace rear differential fluid (4WD)

Replace air cleaner element

Replace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace brake fluid

24 48 7212 36 60

M/TA/T

:: 237

275

Maintenance

ScheduleforS

evereConditions

－－

□

□□

□□

□□□□□

□□□□□□

□□□□□□□

＃

＃

＊

CONTINUEDMaintenance 241

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A, B, C, D, E

A

B

C

D

E

Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.

5,000 mi/8,000 km10,000 mi/16,000 km/1 yr15,000 mi/24,000 km20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr25,000 mi/40,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs35,000 mi/56,000 km40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs45,000 mi/72,000 km3 yrs50,000 mi/80,000 km/3 yrs55,000 mi/88,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs

65,000 mi/104,000 km70,000 mi/112,000 km/4 yrs75,000 mi/120,000 km80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs85,000 mi/136,000 km90,000 mi/144,000 km90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, E.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do item in E.Do items in A, B, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A, E.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do item in E.

Replace transmission fluid (M/T).Replace transmission fluid (A/T).

Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, E.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do item in E.

Replace transmission fluid (A/T).Replace rear differential fluid (4WD).

Do items in A, B, D.

Replace engine oil.Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 281 ).Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches withmultipurpose grease.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Check all lights.Inspect the underbody.Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace dust and pollen filter .Replace air cleaner element every 15,000 mi/24,000 km (independent of time) under dustyconditions, otherwise use Normal Conditionsschedule.

236 Maintenance

Schedule

forSevere

Conditions

(listedby

distance/time)

□□□

□

□

□□□

＊

＃

Maintenance242

95,000 mi/152,000 km100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs105,000 mi/168,000 km6 yrs110,000 mi/176,000 km

110,000 mi/176,000 km/6 yrs110,000 mi/176,000 km/7 yrs115,000 mi/184,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/7 yrs9 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs

Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A, E.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Inspect valve clearance, cold engine.Replace spark plugs.

Do items in A, B.Inspect idle speed.

Do items in A.Do item in E.

Replace transmission fluid (M/T).Do items in A, B, C, D.

Replace transmission fluid (A/T).Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Replace engine coolant, then replace every

60,000mi/96,000km/5yrs.

See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement informationunder special driving conditions.See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

NOTE:

275:

:237

Maintenance

ScheduleforS

evereConditions

(listed

bydistance/time)

CONTINUEDMaintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

243

5,000 mi

10,000 mi

15,000 mi

20,000 mi

25,000 mi

30,000 mi

35,000 mi

40,000 mi

45,000 mi

50,000 mi

55,000 mi

60,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp8,000 km

16,000 km

24,000 km

32,000 km(or 1 year)

40,000 km

48,000 km

56,000 km

64,000 km(or 2 years)

72,000 km

80,000 km

88,000 km


You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

238240

Maintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

244

65,000 mi

70,000 mi

75,000 mi

80,000 mi

85,000 mi

90,000 mi

95,000 mi

100,000 mi

105,000 mi

110,000 mi

115,000 mi

120,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp104,000 km

112,000 km

120,000 km


136,000 km

144,000 km

152,000 km


168,000 km

176,000 km

184,000 km


mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Windshield washer fluid Checkthe level in the reservoir monthly.If weather conditions cause you touse the washers frequently, checkthe reservoir each time you stopfor fuel. See page .

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the page given.

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate light monthly. Seepage .

188

189

258

260

278

285

263

Owner Maintenance Checks

Maintenance 245

Fluid Locations

Maintenance246

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILLDDIIPPSSTTIICCKK((OOrraannggee lloooopp))

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGGFFLLUUIIDD((RReedd ccaapp))

EENNGGIINNEECCOOOOLLAANNTTRREESSEERRVVOOIIRR

CCLLUUTTCCHH FFLLUUIIDD((55--ssppeeeedd MMaannuuaallTTrraannssmmiissssiioonn oonnllyy))((GGrraayy ccaapp))

WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD((BBlluuee ccaapp))

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICCTTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONNFFLLUUIIDD DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK((YYeellllooww lloooopp))

BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD((GGrraayy ccaapp))

RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILLFFIILLLL CCAAPP

To add oil, unscrew and remove theengine oil fill cap on top of the valvecover. Pour in the oil, and install theengine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes and recheck theoil level. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’Oil is a major contributor to your

engine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection.

CONTINUED

Recommended OilAdding Oil

Engine Oil

Maintenance 247

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL FFIILLLL CCAAPP

AAPPII CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN SSEEAALL

The oil’s viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.Select the oil for your vehicleaccording to this chart.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight as shownon the chart. When using syntheticoil, you must follow the oil and filterchange intervals given in themaintenance schedule.

Your Honda does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Honda, toimprove cold weather starting, andto help your engine use less fuel.

If 5W-20 oil is not available, a 5W-30oil may be used. However, it shouldbe replaced with 5W-20 at the nextoil change.

Engine Oil

Maintenance

Synthetic Oil

Additives

248

AAmmbbiieenntt TTeemmppeerraattuurree

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourHonda dealer) is required toremove the filter.

Install a new oil filter according toinstructions that come with it.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the time and distance(miles/kilometers) recommenda-tions in the maintenance schedule.The oil and filter collect contami-nants that can damage your engine ifthey are not removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

1.

2.

4.

3.

CONTINUED

Changing the Oil and Filter

Engine Oil

Maintenance 249

OOIILL DDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTT

WWAASSHHEERR OOIILL FFIILLTTEERR

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator light should go out withinfive seconds. If it does not, turn offthe engine and reinspect yourwork.

Let the engine run for severalminutes and check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel. If necessary, add oil to bringthe level to the upper mark on thedipstick.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Engine Oil

Maintenance250

33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)

4.4 US qt (4.2 , 3.7 Imp qt)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmful to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.The coolant you add should alwaysbe a mixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Never addstraight antifreeze or plain water.

Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water. Itdoes not require any additionalmixing. If it is not available, you mayuse another major-brand non-silicatecoolant as a temporary replacement.Make sure it is a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.However, continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result incorrosion, causing the coolingsystem to malfunction or fail. Havethe cooling system flushed andrefilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

1.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 251


Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Put the radiator cap back on.Tighten it fully.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise, without pressing downon it, until it stops. This relievesany pressure remaining in thecooling system.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Cooling System

Maintenance252

RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

CONTINUED

The cooling system should becompletely drained and refilled withnew coolant according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. Only useHonda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.

Draining the coolant requires accessto the underside of the vehicle.Unless you have the tools andknowledge, you should have thismaintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Remove the radiator cap.

Turn the ignition ON (II). Turnthe heater temperature controldial fully clockwise. Turn theignition off.

Open the hood. Make sure theengine and radiator are cool to thetouch.

1.

2.

3.

Replacing Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 253

To drain the coolant, remove thecover under the radiator.

Loosen the drain plug on thebottom of the radiator. Drain thecoolant into an appropriatecontainer.Use a phillips-head screwdriver to

remove the two bolts, and removethe sixteen holding clips from thecover (12 clips on the bottom and4 clips on the side) with a flat-tipped screwdriver. Then pull thecover down.

4. 5.

Cooling System

Maintenance254

DDRRAAIINN PPLLUUGG

HHOOLLDDIINNGG CCLLIIPPBBOOLLTT BBOOLLTT

To drain the coolant from thereserve tank:

Remove the reserve tankmounting bolt with a wrench, pullout the coolant tube from the twoclips on the upper and lower sideof the fan shroud, then move thereserve tank away from the fanshroud while pulling the bottomtab of the reserve tank out of thehole.

Remove the coolant tube from thefour clips.

Use a wrench to remove the boltfrom the battery hold-down.Remove the seven holding clipsfrom the cover by using a flat-tipped screwdriver. Then pull thebulkhead cover away.

6. 7. 8.

CONTINUED

Cooling System

Maintenance 255

BBOOLLTT

TTAABB

BBOOLLTT

Remove the coolant tube from theradiator.

Put the end of the coolant tubelower than the coolant reservetank and drain the coolant into anappropriate container.

Put the reserve tank back in place,making sure its bottom tab is inthe holder. Reinstall and tightenthe mounting bolt securely.

Reinstall the cover. Lock theholding clips by pushing on thecenter of the clip. Reinstall the boltin the battery hold-down.

When the coolant stops draining,tighten the drain plug at thebottom of the radiator.

Put the cover back in place andtighten the bolts securely.Reinstall the 16 holding-clips. Lookeach clip in place by pushing on itscenter.

Pour Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2 intothe radiator up to the base of thefiller neck. This coolant is amixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Pre-mixingis not required.

Put the coolant tube back in theclips and reinstall the coolant tubeto the radiator securely.

12.

13.

9.

10.

11.

14.

15.

16.

Cooling System

Maintenance256

FFIILLLLEERR NNEECCKK

FFiillll uupp ttoo hheerree

Fill the reserve tank to the MAXmark. Install the reserve tank cap.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it to the first stop.

Remove the radiator cap. Fill theradiator with coolant up to thebase of the filler neck.

Start the engine and hold it at1,500 rpm until the radiator fancomes on. Turn off the engine.Check the coolant level in theradiator and add coolant if needed.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it fully.

If necessary, fill the reserve tankto the MAX mark. Install thereserve tank cap.

Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator cooling fan comes onat least twice. Then stop theengine.

Start the engine and let it run forabout 30 seconds. Then turn offthe engine.

Check the level in the radiator,add coolant if needed.

The cooling system capacity is:

17.

18.19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

With automatic transmission:

With manual transmission:

Maintenance

Cooling System

257


1.43 US gal (5.4 , 1.19 Imp gal)

1.45 US gal (5.5 , 1.21 Imp gal)

Check the windshield washer fluidlevel as follows:

Open the driver’s door.

Look at the side of the reservoirtank located between the door andthe front dashboard.

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal usage. In bad weather,when you use the washers often,check the level every time you stopfor fuel.This reservoir supplies both thewindshield and rear window washers.

The low washer level indicator willlight when the level is low (see page

).

The windshield washer reservoir islocated in the back of the enginecompartment on the left side.

If the fluid level is below the lowerlevel mark, locate the reservoircap in the engine compartment.Remove the cap and fill thereservoir with windshield washerfluid.

Reinstall the cap.

1.

2.

693.

4.

Canadian models

Windshield Washers

Maintenance258

LLOOWWEERR LLEEVVEELL MMAARRKK

FFiillll uupp ttoo hheerree

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Windshield Washers

Maintenance 259

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir.

Antif reeze can damage your vehicle’spaint, while a vinegar/water solutioncan damage the windshield washerpump.

Use only commercially-availablewindshield washer f luid.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)

from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission as shown.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the filler holeto bring it to the upper mark.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Ifit is not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive thevehicle a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

1.

2.

3.

5.

4.


Maintenance

Transmission Fluid

260

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

UUPPPPEERRMMAARRKKLLOOWWEERRMMAARRKK

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the hole.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an API service SG, SH or SJgrade motor oil with a viscosity ofSAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 as atemporary replacement. An SGgrade is preferred, but an SH or SJgrade may be used if SG is notavailable. However, motor oil doesnot contain the proper additives andcontinued use can cause stiffershifting. Replace as soon as it isconvenient.

Put a new washer on the filler bolt,then reinstall the filler bolt andtighten it securely.

6. 5-speed Manual Transmission

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance 261

FFIILLLLEERR BBOOLLTT

CCoorrrreecctt lleevveell

WWAASSHHEERR

Put a new washer on the filler bolt,then reinstall the filler bolt andtighten it securely.

Only use Honda Dual Pump Fluid.Do not use Automatic TransmissionFluid (ATF).

The rear differential should bedrained and refilled with new fluidaccording to the time and distancerecommendations in the mainte-nance schedule.

Check the fluid level with the reardifferential at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thedifferential fluid filler bolt andwasher and carefully feel inside thebolt hole with your finger. The fluidlevel should be up to the edge of thebolt hole. If it is not, slowly addHonda Dual Pump Fluid until itstarts to run out of the hole.

Rear Differential Fluid

Maintenance

4WD models only

262

CCoorrrreeccttlleevveell

WWAASSHHEERRFFIILLLLEERR BBOOLLTT

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement. However, the use ofany non-Honda brake fluid can causecorrosion and decrease the life of thesystem. Have the brake systemflushed and refilled with HondaHeavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 assoon as possible.

Check the fluid level in the reser-voirs monthly. There are up to tworeservoirs, depending on the model.They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

The brake fluid should be replacedaccording to the time recommenda-tion in the maintenance schedule.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Brake System

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance 263

MMAAXX

MMIINN

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. If it is not available, you mayuse another power steering fluid asan emergency replacement.However, continued use can causeincreased wear and poor steering incold weather. Have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.Check the level when the engine is

cold. Look at the side of thereservoir. The fluid should bebetween the UPPER LEVEL andLOWER LEVEL. If it is below theLOWER LEVEL, add power steeringfluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

The fluid should be between theMIN and MAX marks on the side ofthe reservoir. If it is not, add brakefluid to bring it up to that level. Usethe same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Low fluid level can indicate a leak inthe clutch system. Have this systeminspected as soon as possible.

Power SteeringClutch System

Maintenance

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering

264

LLOOWWEERR LLEEVVEELL

MMAAXX UUPPPPEERR LLEEVVEELL

MMIINN

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

To replace it:

The air cleaner element should bereplaced according to the distancerecommendation in the maintenanceschedule.

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the left side ofthe engine compartment.

Loosen the five bolts with aPhillips-head screwdriver or awrench, then lift up the air cleanerhousing cover.

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Replacement

Air Cleaner Element

Maintenance 265

BBOOLLTTSS AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR EELLEEMMEENNTT

BBOOLLTTSS

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, and tighten the five bolts.

Clean the hood latch assembly with amild cleaner, then lubricate it with amultipurpose grease. Lubricate allthe moving parts (as shown),including the pivot. Follow the timeand distance recommendations inthe Maintenance Schedule. If youare not sure how to clean and greasethe latch, contact your Honda dealer.

4.

5.

Air Cleaner Element, Hood Latch

Maintenance

Hood Latch

266

LLAATTCCHH AASSSSEEMMBBLLYY

CONTINUED

Clean up any dirt and oil that havecollected around the ignition coils.

Use a wrench to remove the boltholding the ignition coil. Pull theignition coil up slightly.

Disconnect the wire connectorfrom the ignition coil by pushingon the lock tab and pulling on theconnector. Pull on the plasticconnector, not the wires.

Remove the ignition coil.

Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

Put the new spark plug into thesocket, then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

Remove the four nuts with awrench, then remove the coilcover.

The spark plugs in your vehicle are aspecial iridium-tipped design forlonger life. The spark plugs shouldbe replaced according to the distancerecommendation in the maintenanceschedule.

1.

6.

7.

5.2.

4.

3.

Maintenance

Spark Plugs

Replacement

267

BBOOLLTT

IIGGNNIITTIIOONN CCOOIILL

NNUUTTSS NNUUTTSS

CCOONNNNEECCTTOORR

LLOOCCKK TTAABB

＋－

Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:

Connect the wire connector to theignition coil. Make sure it locks inplace.

Push the ignition coil down all theway. Install the bolt.

Repeat this procedure for theother three spark plugs.

Reinstall the coil cover, andtighten the four nuts.

Install the ignition coil into thehole.

Spark Plug Gap:

NGK:DENSO:

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

Maintenance

Spark Plugs

Specifications:

268

13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)

SKJ20DR-M11IZFR6K-11

0.04 in (1.1 mm) 00.1 mm

Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

Check the battery terminals forcorrosion (a white or yellowishpowder). To remove it, cover theterminals with a solution of bakingsoda and water. It will bubble up andturn brown. When this stops, wash itoff with plain water. Dry off thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.Coat the terminals with grease tohelp prevent future corrosion.

Check the battery condition bylooking at the test indicator windowon the battery.The label on the battery explains thetest indicator’s colors.

Check the condition of your vehicle’sbattery monthly. You should checkthe color of the test indicator window,and for corrosion on the terminals.

Battery posts,terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

CONTINUED

Battery

Maintenance

WARNING:

Wash hands after handling.

269

TTEESSTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR WWIINNDDOOWW

－

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damage to the vehicle’selectrical system.

If the terminals are severely cor-roded, clean them with baking sodaand water. Then use a wrench toloosen and remove the cables fromthe terminals. Always disconnect thenegative ( ) cable first and recon-nect it last. Clean the battery termi-nals with a terminal cleaning tool orwire brush. Reconnect and tightenthe cables, then coat the terminalswith grease.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. The nexttime you turn on the radio you willsee ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

). You will then have to set theclock and enter your station presets.178

Battery

Maintenance270

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

Charging the battery with the cablesconnected can seriously damage yourvehicle’s electronic controls. Detachthe battery cables bef ore connectingthe battery to a charger.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

To replace a wiper blade:

Front:Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

Rear:Raise the wiper arm off the hatchglass and hold it.1.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Wiper Blades

271

RREEAARRFFRROONNTT

WWIIPPEERR AARRMMSS

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metal rein-forcement along the back edge,remove the metal reinforcementstrips from the old wiper blade andinstall them in the slots along theedge of the new blade.

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold it in while youpush the blade assembly towardthe base of the arm.

If you are changing the rear wiperblade, go to step 6.

4.3.2.

Maintenance

Wiper Blades

272

LLOOCCKK TTAABB

BBLLAADDEE RREEIINNFFOORRCCEEMMEENNTT

BBLLAADDEE

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield or the hatch glass.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance 273

Your vehicle’s air conditioning is asealed system. Any major mainte-nance, such as recharging, should bedone by a qualified mechanic. Youcan do a couple of things to makesure the air conditioning worksefficiently.

Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least tenminutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant.

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a). (See Specifications on page

.)

Periodically check the engine’sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

343

Air Conditioning System

Maintenance274

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG CCOONNDDEENNSSEERR

Whenever you have the air conditioningsystem serviced, make sure the servicef acility uses a ref rigerant recyclingsystem. This system captures theref rigerant f or reuse. Releasingref rigerant into the atmosphere candamage the environment.

The condenser and radiator f ins bendeasily. Only use a low-pressure sprayor sof t-bristle brush to clean them.

To replace it:

The dust and pollen filter is locatedbehind the glove box.

Remove the dust and pollen filtercover by pushing in on the lock tab,then pulling the cover toward you.

The dust and pollen filter removespollen and dust that is brought infrom the outside through the heatingand cooling system.

This filter should be replaced every30,000 miles (48,000 km) undernormal conditions. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air from industry anddiesel-powered vehicles. Replace itmore often if air flow from theheating and cooling system becomesless than usual.

Open the glove box. Remove thehooks on the side panels bypushing on the end of each hookfrom the inside of the glove box.Pivot the glove box out of the way.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Dust and Pollen Filter

Replacement

275

CCOOVVEERRHHOOOOKKSS

TTAABB

Remove the first filter by pulling itstraight out of the air conditioningunit. Remove the second filter bysliding it to the left, then pulling itout.

Remove the old filter from thefilter case.

Install the new filter in the case.Make sure the ‘‘AIR FLOW’’arrows on the filter and the filtercase face the same direction.

Install the dust and pollen filtersinto the air conditioning unit.Make sure the ‘‘AIR FLOW’’arrows on the filter pointdownward.

Reinstall the dust and pollen filtercover.

Pivot the glove box up intoposition. Reinstall the hooks intothe side panel of the glove box.Close the glove box.

If you are not sure how to replacethe dust and pollen filters, have themreplaced by your Honda dealer.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Maintenance

Dust and Pollen Filter

276

DDUUSSTT AANNDD PPOOLLLLEENN FFIILLTTEERRSS

Check the condition of the drive belt.Examine the edges of belt for cracksor fraying.

An auto-tensioner adjusts the tensionof the drive belt. The pointer on theauto-tensioner should be in theproper range. It should be checkedaccording to the time and distancerecommendations in themaintenance schedule.

If the pointer is not within the properrange or you see signs of wear, havethe drive belt replaced by yourHonda dealer as soon as possible.

Drive Belt

Maintenance 277

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

PPrrooppeerr rraannggee

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated. Thefollowing pages give more detailedinformation on how and when tocheck air pressure, how to inspectyour tires for damage and wear, andwhat to do when your tires need tobe replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life and ridingcomfort. Underinflated tires wearunevenly, adversely affect handlingand fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, are moreprone to damage from road hazards,and wear unevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the vehiclehas been parked for at least threehours. If you have to drive thevehicle before checking the tirepressure, the tires can still beconsidered ‘‘cold’’ if you drive lessthan 1 mile (1.6 km).

Inflation

Tires

Maintenance278

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot (the vehicle has beendriven several miles), you will seereadings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreading. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the specified coldpressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeeds.

These pressures are also given onthe tire information label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured.However, because leakage is oftenvery slow, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

Honda strongly recommends thatyou not drive faster than postedspeed limits and conditions allow. Ifyou decide it is safe to drive at highspeeds, be sure to adjust the cold tirepressures as shown below. If you donot adjust the tire pressure, exces-sive heat can build up and causesudden tire failure.

When you return to normal speeddriving, be sure to readjust the tirepressure for normal driving. Youshould wait until the tires are coldbefore adjusting the tire pressure.

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Speed over 100mph (160 km/h)

Front/Rear:

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal Driving

Tire Pressure Adjustment for HighSpeed Driving

Maintenance 279

P205/70R15 95S

P205/70R15 95S

26 psi (180 kPa ,1.8 kgf/cm )

35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Excessive tread wear.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord. Your vehicle’s tires have wear indica-

tors molded into the tread. When thetread wears down to that point, youwill see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wideband running across the tread. Thisshows there is less than 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Atire that is this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see thetread wear indicator in three or moreplaces around the tire.

The tires were properly balanced bythe factory. They may need to berebalanced at some time before theyare worn out. Have your dealercheck the tires if you feel a consis-tent vibration while driving. A tireshould always be rebalanced if it isremoved from the wheel for repair.

Inspection Maintenance

Tires

Maintenance280

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKKSS

TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORRSS

When shopping for replacementtires, you may find that some tiresare ‘‘directional.’’ This means theyare designed to rotate only in onedirection. If you use directional tires,they should be rotated only front-to-back.

Make sure the installer balances thewheels when you have new tiresinstalled. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. Your vehicle’soriginal tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’balanced at the factory. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, youshould have the tires rotated every10,000 miles (16,000 km). Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated.

(Only on vehicles equipped withaluminum wheels)

Tire Rotation

Tires

Maintenance 281

FFrroonntt

((FFoorr NNoonn--ddiirreeccttiioonnaallTTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))

((FFoorr DDiirreeccttiioonnaallTTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))

FFrroonntt

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly genuine Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, then replace the twofront tires or the two rear tires as apair. Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your vehicle’s han-dling.

The tires that came with yourvehicle were selected to match theperformance capabilities of thevehicle while providing the bestcombination of handling, ridecomfort, and long life. You shouldreplace them with radial tires of thesame size, load range, speed rating,and maximum cold tire pressurerating (as shown on the tire’ssidewall). Mixing radial and bias-plytires on your vehicle can reduce itsbraking ability, traction, and steeringaccuracy.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tire sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system towork inconsistently.

If you ever need to replace a wheel,make sure the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheelthat came on your vehicle. Re-placement wheels are available atyour Honda dealer.

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

Maintenance282

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

＋ If you mount snow tires on yourHonda, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels to balanceyour vehicle’s handling in all weatherconditions. Keep in mind the tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay not be as high as your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roadsare clear. Check with the tire dealerfor maximum speed recommenda-tions.

Wheels:

Tires:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading.

Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have anall-weather tread design. Theyshould be suitable for most winterdriving conditions. Tires withoutthese markings are designed foroptimum traction in dry conditions.They may not provide adequateperformance in winter driving.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

344

CONTINUED

Snow TiresWheels and Tires Winter Driving

Tires

Maintenance 283

15 x 6JJ

P205/70R15 95S

Because your Honda has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices on thefront tires. Use traction devices onlywhen required by driving conditionsor local laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires.

Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should notbe used. No matter how tight theyseem to be installed, they can comeinto contact with the body andsuspension, causing serious damage.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with them installed. Ifyou hear them coming in contactwith the body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Make sure the cables areinstalled tightly, and that they arenot contacting the brake lines orsuspension.Remove them as soon as you begindriving on cleared roads.

Tire Chains

Tires

Maintenance284

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

Check the operation of your vehicle’sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can create anunsafe condition by reducing yourvehicle’s visibility and the ability tosignal your intentions to otherdrivers.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance 285

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT

FFRROONNTT PPAARRKKIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL//SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERR LLIIGGHHTTSS

Check the following:

Headlights (low and high beam)Parking lightsTaillightsBrake lightsHigh-mount brake lightTurn signalsBack-up lightsHazard light functionLicense plate lightSide marker lightsDaytime running lights(Canadian models)

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on page todetermine what type of replacementbulb is needed.

343

Lights

Maintenance286

HHIIGGHH--MMOOUUNNTT BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTT SSTTOOPP//TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTTSS

LLIICCEENNSSEE PPLLAATTEE LLIIGGHHTT BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTT

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLIIGGHHTT

SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERRLLIIGGHHTT

Open the hood.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs, one on each side. Whenreplacing a bulb, handle it by its steelbase and protect the glass fromcontact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustment of the headlights shouldbe performed by a Honda technicianor other qualified mechanic.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Replacing a Headlight BulbHeadlight Aiming

Maintenance

Lights

287

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot it out ofthe way and remove the bulb.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,making sure the tabs are in theirslots. Pivot the hold-down wireback in place and clip the end intothe slot.

Install the rubber seal over theback of the headlight assembly.Make sure it is right side up; it ismarked ‘‘TOP.’’

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb. Make sure it isconnected securely.Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb. Remove the socket from the

headlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Open the hood. The front sidemarker/turn signal light is next tothe headlight bulb.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

4.

5.

6.

7. 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Front Side Marker/Turn Signal Light Bulb

288

Use a wrench to loosen the bolt onthe battery hold-down. Removethe seven holding clips from thecover by using a flat-tippedscrewdriver. Then pull theradiator support cover away.

To access the parking light bulb:

Open the hood. The front parkinglight is next to the headlight bulb.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the parking lights andcheck that the new bulb isworking.

Reinstall the radiator supportcover. Lock the holding clips bypushing on the center of each clip.Tighten the bolt on the batteryhold-down.

Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Front Parking LightBulb

289

BBOOLLTT

Open the tailgate. Place a cloth onthe edge of the cover. Remove thecovers by carefully prying on theedge with a small flat-tippedscrewdriver.

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the taillight assemblymounting screw under each cover.

Determine which of the four bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight, back-up light, turn signal, or sidemarker.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the taillight assembly out ofthe rear pillar.

1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Rear Bulbs

290

CCOOVVEERR

SSCCRREEWW


Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.


Align the clips on the taillightassembly with the holes in thebody, then push the taillightassembly into place. Tighten thetwo mounting screws securely andreinstall the covers.

Place a cloth and insert a smallflat-tipped screwdriver betweenthe right edge of the lens and thehousing. The lens will come down.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb in untilit bottoms in the socket.

Turn on the parking lights andcheck that the new bulb isworking.

Put the lens back into the lightassembly, left side first. Push onthe right edge until it snaps intoplace.

1.

2.

6.

7.

8.

9.

3.

4.

Maintenance

Lights

Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

291



Put the socket back into the lightassembly and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Put the cover back onto the lightassembly. Push it on until it locksin place.

Open the tailgate. Remove thelight assembly cover by pushing inon the tabs on both sides andpulling the cover off.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Lights

Maintenance292

Remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens witha fingernail file or a small flat-tipscrewdriver. Do not pry on theedge of the housing around thelens.

Although the ceiling light, cargo arealight and spotlights come apart thesame way, they do not use the sametype of bulbs.

Ceiling light:Pry on the rear edge of the lensnear both sides.

Spotlights:Pry on the front edge in front ofboth spotlights.

Cargo area light:Pry on the front edge to the lensnear both sides.

1.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Interior Light Bulbs

293

SSPPOOTTLLIIGGHHTTSSCCEEIILLIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs. Snap the lens back in place.

3.

2.

Lights

Maintenance294

CCAARRGGOO AARREEAA LLIIGGHHTT

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Nonporous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter(see page ).

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc. arecompletely dry.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

Support the front and rear wiperblade arms with a folded towel orrag so they do not touch thewindshield.

Disconnect the battery.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Reverse(5-speed manual) or Park(automatic).

If possible, run the engine for awhile periodically (preferably oncea month).

If you store your vehicle for 12months or longer, have your Hondadealer perform the inspections calledfor in the 24 months maintenanceschedule (Normal Conditions) assoon as you take it out of storage(see page ). The replacementscalled for in the maintenanceschedule are not needed unless thevehicle has actually reached thattime or mileage.

249

238

Maintenance

Storing Your Vehicle

295

296

Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour Honda helps to keep it ‘‘new’’looking. This section gives you hintson how to clean your vehicle andpreserve its appearance: the paint,brightwork, wheels, and interior.Also included are several things youcan do to help prevent corrosion.

.................................Exterior Care . 298.....................................Washing . 298

.......................................Waxing . 299....................Aluminum Wheels . 299

..........................Paint Touch-up . 300..................................Interior Care . 301...................................Carpeting . 301.................................Floor Mats . 301

.........................................Fabric . 302...........................................Vinyl . 302

.......................................Leather . 302...................................Seat Belts . 302....................................Windows . 303

..........................Air Fresheners . 303....................Corrosion Protection . 304

.................................Body Repairs . 305

Appearance Care

Appearance Care

297

Frequent washing helps preserveyour vehicle’s beauty. Dirt and gritcan scratch the paint, while tree sapand bird droppings can permanentlyruin the finish.

Wash your vehicle in a shady area,not in direct sunlight. If the vehicle isparked in the sun, move it into theshade and let the exterior cool downbefore you start.

When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

As you dry the vehicle, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page ).

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly withcool water to remove loose dirt.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this Owner’sManual.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a mild detergent, such asdishwashing liquid or a productmade especially for car washing.

Wash the vehicle using the waterand detergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe vehicle does not need waxing.

300

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Washing

298

Chemical solvents and strong cleanerscan damage the paint, metal, andplastic on your vehicle.

The radio antenna on your vehicle doesnot need to be removed when you use a‘‘drive-through’’car wash. However, ifyou remove the antenna, make sure toreinstall it and tighten it securely usingan appropriate tool.

－

－

Always wash and dry the wholevehicle before waxing it. You shouldwax your vehicle, including the metaltrim, whenever water sits on thesurface in large patches. It shouldform into beads or droplets afterwaxing.

Polishes Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that removethe top layer of the finish. Youshould use a polish on your Honda ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Clean your Honda’s aluminum alloywheels as you do the rest of theexterior. Wash them with the samesolution, and rinse them thoroughly.

The wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum fromcorroding and tarnishing. Usingharsh chemicals, including somecommercial wheel cleaners, or stiffbrushes can damage this clear-coat.Only use a mild detergent and softbrush or sponge to clean the wheels.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the vehicle doesnot need waxing.

Waxes A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your Hondawhen it is new.

You should use a quality liquid orpaste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

On some models

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Waxing Aluminum Wheels

299

Your dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your vehicle’s color. The colorcode is printed on a sticker on thedriver’s doorjamb. Take this code toyour dealer so you are sure to getthe correct color.

Inspect your vehicle frequently forchips or scratches in the paint.Repair them right away to preventcorrosion of the metal underneath.Use the touch-up paint only on smallchips and scratches. More extensivepaint damage should be repaired bya professional.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Paint Touch-up

300

Vacuum the carpeting frequently toremove dirt. Ground-in dirt will makethe carpet wear out faster.Periodically shampoo the carpet tokeep it looking new. Use one of thefoam-type carpet cleaners on themarket. Follow the instructions thatcome with the cleaner, applying itwith a sponge or soft brush. Keepthe carpeting as dry as possible bynot adding water to the foam.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat inthe driver’s footwell, make sure itfits properly and that it can be usedwith the floor mat anchor.

Do not put additional floor mats ontop of the anchored mat, otherwisethe additional mats may slideforward and interfere with the pedals.

If you replace it, use a genuineHonda floor mat that is designed tobe used with the floor mat anchor inyour vehicle.

If you remove the floor mat, makesure to re-anchor it when you put itback in your vehicle.

The Honda driver’s floor mat thatcame with your vehicle was designedto be hooked over the floor matanchor. This keeps the floor matfrom sliding forward and possiblyinterfering with the pedals.

Carpeting Floor Mats

Interior Care

Appearance Care 301

Vacuum dirt and dust out of thematerial frequently. For generalcleaning, use a solution of mild soapand lukewarm water, letting it air dry.To clean off stubborn spots, use acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Test it on a hidden area of the fabricfirst, to make sure it does not bleachor stain the fabric. Follow theinstructions that come with thecleaner.

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

Vacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay particularattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with clear water, thenbuff it with a clean, dry cloth. Iffurther cleaning is needed, use asoap specifically for leather, such assaddle soap. Apply this soap with adamp, soft cloth. Wipe down andbuff as described above.

If your seat belts get dirty, you canuse a soft brush with a mixture ofmild soap and warm water to cleanthem. Do not use bleach, dye, orcleaning solvents. They can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts air-dry before you use the vehicle.


Fabric Vinyl

Leather

Seat Belts

Interior Care

Appearance Care302

LLOOOOPP

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Clean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces.

If you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of yourvehicle, it is best to use a solid type.Some liquid air fresheners containchemicals that may cause parts ofthe interior trim and fabric to crackor discolor.

If you use a liquid air freshener,make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

Interior Care

Appearance Care

Windows Air Fresheners

303

The rear window defogger wires arebonded to the inside of the glass.Wiping vigorously up-and-down candislodge and break the def ogger wires.When cleaning the rear window, usegentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.

Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your vehicle. Thisis especially important in areasthat use road salt in winter. It isalso a good idea in humid climatesand areas subject to salt air.Vehicles equipped with ABS havea sensor and wiring at each wheel.Be careful not to damage them.

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your Honda. You canhelp keep your vehicle fromcorroding by performing somesimple periodic maintenance:

Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your vehicle:

Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thevehicle stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the vehicle.

Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourvehicle inspected and repairedperiodically.

1.

2.

Corrosion Protection

Appearance Care304

When reporting your collision to theinsurance company, tell them youwant genuine Honda parts used inthe repair. Although most insurersrecognize the quality of originalparts, some may try to specify thatthe repairs be done with otheravailable parts. You should investi-gate this before any repairs havebegun.

Take your vehicle to your authorizedHonda dealer for inspection after therepairs are completed. Your dealercan make sure that quality materialswere used, and that corrosion-preventive coatings were applied toall repaired and replaced parts.

Body repairs can affect your vehicle’sresistance to corrosion. If yourvehicle needs repairs after a collision,pay close attention to the parts usedin the repair and the quality of thework.

Make sure the repair facility usesgenuine Honda replacement bodyparts. Some companies make sheetmetal pieces that seem to duplicatethe original Honda body parts, butare actually inferior in fit, finish, andcorrosion resistance. Once installed,they do not give the same high-quality appearance.

Body Repairs

Appearance Care 305

306

This section covers the more-common problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 308..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 318

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very

.....................................Slowly . 318The Starter Operates

................................Normally . 319

................................Jump Starting . 320............If Your Engine Overheats . 323

.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 325..........Charging System Indicator . 326

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 327.......................Readiness Codes . 328

...............Brake System Indicator . 329..................Closing the Moonroof . 330

..............................................Fuses . 331..........Checking and Replacing . 332

......................Emergency Towing . 337

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking Care of the Unexpected 307

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Stopping in traffic or on the shoulderof a busy road is dangerous. Driveslowly along the shoulder until youget to an exit or an area to stop thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

Park the vehicle on firm, level andnon-slippery ground away fromtraffic. Put the transmission inPark (automatic) or Reverse(manual). Apply the parking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lightsand turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

If you are towing a trailer, unhitchthe trailer.

Open the tailgate.1.

2.

3.


Changing a Flat Tire

308

SSPPAARREE TTIIRREEJJAACCKK

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

CONTINUED

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

To keep the tailgate door open,use the stop from the tool kit. Putthe stop on the support strut asshown.

The tool and jack are behind acover in the cargo area on thepassenger’s side. Remove thecover by turning the handlecounterclockwise, then pulling outthe cover.

6.5.4.



309

SSTTOOPP CCOOVVEERR

Remove the spare tire cover. Donot forcibly pull off the cover oryou may damage it.

Your vehicle is equipped with asoft vinyl spare tire cover. Thefollowing shows you how toremove the cover.

Your vehicle is equipped with ahard plastic spare tire cover. Seepage for how to remove thecover.

Zip open the cover. Pull out the cover’s two lower flaps.Don’t pull the top of the cover, oryou will tear it.

Remove the cover.

Pull the upper flaps out bygradually working your hands upthe sides of the cover.

7.

8. 9.

11.

10.

311

On LX and EX models in the U.S. andCanada



Soft vinyl spare tire cover


Taking Care of the Unexpected310

Unzip the flap around the loweredge of the cover.

Pull off the center spacer. Usingthe wheel wrench, loosen thethree wheel nuts and remove them.Remove the spare tire from theholder.

Pull out the bottom of the cover,then gradually pull it off.

12. 14.13.

CONTINUED

On EX-L model in CanadaHard plastic spare tire cover



311

CCEENNTTEERR SSPPAACCEERR

Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2turn with the wheel wrench.

Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. It ispointed to by an arrow molded intothe underside of the body. Placethe jack under the jacking point.Turn the end bracket clockwiseuntil the top of the jack contactsthe jacking point. Make sure thecenter of the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

15. 16. 17.



312

WWHHEEEELL NNUUTT EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONN

WWHHEEEELL WWRREENNCCHHJJAACCKKIINNGG PPOOIINNTT

CONTINUED

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully, it may be hot fromdriving.

Remove the wheel nuts and flattire. Temporarily place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface of the wheel facing up.You could scratch the wheel if youput it face down.

18. 19. 20.



BBRRAAKKEE HHUUBB

Put the flat tire on the spare tireholder. Put the wheel nuts onfinger-tight, then tighten themwith the wheel wrench.Put the center spacer in the centerof the wheel.

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Install the cover on the sideof the cargo area.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap from theflat tire.

Lower the vehicle to the groundand remove the jack.

23.

21. 22. 24.

25.



314

CCEENNTTEERR SSPPAACCEERR

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

CONTINUED

Step back to check the alignmentof the logo. If needed, pivot thecover until the logo is straight.

Hold the cover at the 10 o’clockand 2 o’clock positions, then placethe top of it over the spare tire.

Store the tool kit in the storage binunder the cargo area floor.

Close the tailgate.

Install the spare tire cover.

26.

27.

28.29. 30.




Soft vinyl spare tire cover

315

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

Make sure the cover is at roomtemperature bef ore you install it. If it’stoo cold, it won’t f it easily over the tire.

Starting at the top of the tire,position the outside seam of thecover slightly over the outsideedge of the tire. Pull the cover on,a little at a time, and alternate sideto side along the tire until youreach the bottom.

If needed, readjust the cover tosmooth out any wrinkles.

Pull the bottom of the cover overthe tire.

Zip the cover closed.31. 32.

33.

34.



SSPPAARREE TTIIRREE BBRRAACCKKEETT

OOUUTTSSIIDDEE SSEEAAMM

Place the top of the cover over thespare tire, then gradually push thebottom of the cover over thebottom of the tire.

Make sure the cover is horizontal.If needed, pivot the cover until thecover is horizontal.

Zip the cover closed.35. 36. 37.




Hard plastic spare tire cover

317

Diagnosing why your engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don’t light at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things: Turn the ignition switch to START

(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there is proba-bly something wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. (See

on page .)

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or Neutral.

320

337

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

If Your Engine Won’t Start


If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition of thebattery and terminal connections(see page ). You can then tryjump starting the vehicle from abooster battery (see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Your vehicle has the ImmobilizerSystem. You should use aproperly-coded master or valet keyto start the engine (see page ).A key that is not properly codedwill cause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly.

Do you have fuel? Turn theignition switch to ON (II) for aminute and watch the fuel gauge.The low fuel level warning lightmay not be working, so you werenot reminded to fill the tank.

269

320

200

85 331

337

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

If Your Engine Won’t Start


If your vehicle’s battery has rundown, you may be able to start theengine by using a booster battery.Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

To jump start your vehicle, followthese directions closely:

Open the hood and check thephysical condition of the battery(see page ). In very coldweather, check the condition ofthe electrolyte. If it seems slushyor like ice, do not try jump startinguntil it thaws.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, stereo system,lights, etc.

Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

You cannot start a Honda with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

1.

2.

269

Jump Starting


A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

＋

＋

－

CONTINUED

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourHonda’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Remove the power steeringresevoir from the bracket. Pull itaway from the grounding strap.

3. 4. 5.

Jump Starting


BBRRAACCKKEETT

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthe jumper cable connections tomake sure they have good metal-to-metal contact.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the car until all are disconnected.Otherwise, you may cause anelectrical short.6.

7.

8.

Jump Starting


BBOOOOSSTTEERR BBAATTTTEERRYY

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point then continue driving.

The pointer of your vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange under most conditions.It may go higher if you are driving upa long steep hill on a very hot day. Ifit climbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.Turn off the heating and coolingsystem and all other accessories.Turn on the hazard warningindicators.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thehood.

Your vehicle can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.In either case, you should takeimmediate action.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

If Your Engine Overheats


Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). If the level is below theMIN mark, add coolant to halfwaybetween the MIN and MAX marks.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. Thisreleases any remaining pressure inthe cooling system. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum. Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may also have toadd coolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair. (See

on page .)

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

10.

9.

8.

7.

6.

11.

12.

337

189

337

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

If Your Engine Overheats


Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If the lightdoes not go out within ten seconds,turn off the engine. There is amechanical problem that needs tobe repaired before you cancontinue driving. (See

on page .)

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. It shouldnever come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing, itindicates that the oil pressuredropped very low for a moment, thenrecovered. If the indicator stays onwith the engine running, it showsthat the engine has lost oil pressureand serious engine damage ispossible. In either case, you shouldtake immediate action.

Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood and check the oillevel (see page ). Although oillevel and oil pressure are notdirectly connected, an engine thatis very low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

1.

2.

4.

3.

188

247

337Emergency

Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator


LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is ON (II), and goout after the engine starts. If itcomes on brightly when the engineis running, it indicates that thecharging system has stoppedcharging the battery.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories: radio, heater, A/C, reardefogger, cruise control, etc. Try notto use other electrically-operatedcontrols such as the power windows.Keep the engine running and takeextra care not to stall it. Starting theengine will discharge the batteryrapidly.

By eliminating as much of theelectrical load as possible, you candrive several miles (kilometers)before the battery is too dischargedto keep the engine running. Drive toa service station or garage whereyou can get technical assistance.

Charging System Indicator


CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, it indicates one ofthe engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeyour vehicle to put out excessiveemissions. Continued operation maycause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capand tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. Replace the fuel fill cap if it ismissing. Tightening the cap will notmake the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes one driving trip.

If the indicator remains on past onedriving trip, or the fuel cap was notloose or missing, have the vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible. Drive moderately until thedealer has inspected the problem.Avoid full-throttle acceleration anddriving at high speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your vehicle if this indicatorcomes on repeatedly, even though itmay turn off as you continue driving.

This indicator may also come onalong with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

To check if they are set, turn theignition ON (II), but do not start theengine. The Malfunction IndicatorLamp will come on for 20 seconds. Ifit then goes off, the readiness codesare set. If it blinks 5 times, thereadiness codes are not set.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If possible, do not take your vehiclefor a state emissions test until thereadiness codes are set. Refer toState Emissions Testing for moreinformation. (See page .)351

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


Readiness Codes

328

＊＊

＊＊

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and cautiously.

If it comes on at any other time, itindicates a problem with the vehicle’sbrake system. In most cases, theproblem is a low fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir. Press lightly onthe brake pedal to see if it feelsnormal. If it does, check the brakefluid level the next time you stop at aservice station (see page ). If thefluid level is low, take the vehicle toyour dealer and have the brakesystem inspected for leaks or wornbrake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. Because of thebrake system’s dual-circuit design, aproblem in one part of the systemwill still give you braking at twowheels. You will feel the brake pedalgo down much farther before thevehicle begins to slow down, and youwill have to press harder on thepedal. The distance needed to stopwill be much longer.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of thelonger distance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible. (See

on page .)

The Brake System Indicatornormally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to check the parking brake.It comes on and stays lit if you do notfully release the parking brake.

If the ABS indicator comes on withthis indicator, have the vehicleinspected by your Honda dealerimmediately.

263337

On models equipped with ABS

EmergencyTowing

Brake System Indicator


UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn

BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

Remove the wrench. Reinstall theround plug.

To remove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner, turn theplug by using a screwdriver orcoin, then pry it out. Make sure toalign the tabs on the round plug tothe notches on the ceilling asshown in the illustration.

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit under the cargo areafloor.

1.

2.

3.4. 5.

6.

331

Closing the Moonroof


RROOUUNNDD PPLLUUGG

TTAABB NNOOTTCCHH SSOOCCKKEETT

All the electrical circuits in yourvehicle have fuses to protect themfrom a short circuit or overload.These fuses are located in two fuseboxes.

The under-hood fuse box is locatedin the engine compartment on thedriver’s side. To open it, push thetabs as shown.

The interior fuse box is underneaththe steering column. To remove thefuse box lid, pull it toward you andtake the lid out of its hinges.

Fuses


TTAABB

IINNTTEERRIIOORRUUNNDDEERR--HHOOOODD

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check the component’soperation.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-head screw-driver.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

3.

1.

2.335 336

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses


BBLLOOWWNN

FFUUSSEE

CONTINUED

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

5.4.

Fuses


FFUUSSEE PPUULLLLEERRBBLLOOWWNN

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your vehicle.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

6.


Fuses

334

Replacing a fuse with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have a replace-ment f use with the proper rating f or thecircuit, install one with a lower rating.

－

－

－

＊

＊

＊

No.

No.

CONTINUED

Amps. Circuits Protected

Amps. Circuits Protected

12345

678910111213141516171819202122232425

15 A10 A10 A10 A

Ignition Coil

Daytime running lightsACGNot Used

7.5 A20 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A

7.5 A10 A10 A20 A20 A15 A15 A7.5 A20 A

20 A20 A20 A20 A

Power Window RelayMoonroofAccessory, RadioRear WiperMeterNot UsedDaytime running lightsSRSRemote Control MirrorsLAF HeaterHeated SeatFuel Pump

Turn Signal LightsFront WiperNot UsedFront Right Power WindowFront Left Power WindowRear Left Power WindowRear Right Power Window

: On Canadian models

Rear Accessory Power Socket

Front Accessory Power Socket

Fuses


INTERIOR FUSE BOX

－

－

－

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

1234567891011121314151617181920

20 A15 A15 A20 A15 A15 A15 A

10 A30 A20 A40 A40 A40 A15 A20 A15 A30 A100 A50 A

Condenser FanSmall LightInterior LightCooling FanHazardFI ECUHorn, StopNot UsedBack UpABS MotorRear DefrosterHeater MotorPower WindowOptionLeft HeadlightDoor LockRight HeadlightABS F/SBatteryIgnition 1Spare Fuses21 25 7.5A 30A


Fuses

336

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

－

－

－

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service or,if you belong to one, an organizationthat provides roadside assistance.Never tow your vehicle behindanother vehicle with just a rope orchain. It is very dangerous.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension andcables lift that end of the vehicle offthe ground. Your vehicle’ssuspension and body can beseriously damaged.

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

Any othermethod of towing will damage thedrive system. When you contact thetowing agency, inform them that aflat-bed is required.

Refer toon page

for non-emergency towinginformation.224

Wheel Lift Equipment

Sling-type Equipment

Flat-bed Equipment

Never tow your vehicle withwheel lif t equipment.

This method oftowing your CR-V is unacceptable.

This is the only way totransport your vehicle.

Towing Your VehicleBehind a Motorhome

Emergency Towing


Towing a 4WD CR-V with only twotires on the ground will damage partsof the 4WD system. It should betransported on a f lat-bed truck ortrailer.

338

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Honda, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 340................................Specifications . 342

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 344

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 344.................................Treadwear . 344

......................................Traction . 344.............................Temperature . 345

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 346......Driving in Foreign Countries . 347

.......................Emissions Controls . 348.....................The Clean Air Act . 348

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 348

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 348

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 348

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 349....................PGM-FI System . 349

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 349

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 349

....................Replacement Parts . 349..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 350

..............State Emissions Testing . 351

Technical Information

Technical Information 339

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourHonda dealer uses to register yourvehicle for warranty purposes. It isalso necessary for licensing andinsuring your vehicle. The easiestplace to find the VIN is on a platefastened to the top of the dashboard.You can see it by looking throughthe windshield on the driver’s side. Itis also on the Certification label at-tached to the driver’s doorjamb, andis stamped on the engine com-partment bulkhead. The VIN is alsoprovided in bar code on theCertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information340

VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN LLAABBEELL

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block.

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers


EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

MMAANNUUAALL TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

Specifications


Dimensions

Weights

Engine

Capacities

178.6 in (4,537 mm)70.2 in (1,782 mm)66.2 in (1,682 mm)103.1 in (2,620 mm)60.4 in (1,533 mm)60.6 in (1,538 mm)

3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)144 cu-in (2,354 cm )

9.6 : 1

15.3 US gal (58 , 12.8 Imp gal)

4.4 US qt (4.2 , 3.7 Imp qt)4.2 US qt (4.0 , 3.5 Imp qt)5.6 US qt (5.3 , 4.7 Imp qt)

1.43 US gal (5.4 , 1.19 Imp gal)1.88 US gal (7.1 , 1.56 Imp gal)

1.45 US gal (5.5 , 1.21 Imp gal)1.90 US gal (7.2 , 1.58 Imp gal)

3.3 US qt (3.1 , 2.7 Imp qt)3.1 US qt (2.9 , 2.6 Imp qt)

7.6 US qt (7.2 , 6.3 Imp qt)6.9 US qt (6.5 , 5.7 Imp qt)2.0 US qt (1.9 , 1.7 Imp qt)2.4 US qt (2.3 , 2.0 Imp qt)


LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Fuel tank

Engine oil

See spark plug maintenancesection page 268 .

Water cooled 4-stroke DOHCVTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine


2.2 US qt (2.1 , 1.8 Imp qt)

Enginecoolant

Automatictransmissionfluid

ManualtransmissionfluidReardifferentialfluid (4WD)Windshieldwasherreservoir

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:0.16 US gal (0.6 , 0.13 Imp gal)

Approx.

FrontRear

Change

Without filterTotal

1 :2 :

ChangeTotal

ChangeTotalChange

4WD2WD

Total4WD2WD

ChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

U.S. VehiclesCanadaVehicles

4WD2WD


Manual Transmission

1

2

2

Including filter

－－

－

－－

－－－－－－－－－－

－－

Specifications


Air Conditioning

Battery

Tires

Alignment

Fuses

Lights

HFC-134a (R-134a)17.0 18.7 oz (480 530 g)

SP-10

12 V12 V

60/55 W21/5 W

36 AH/5 HR

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

21 W3 CP8 W4 CP8 W5 W21 W21/5 W21 W

12 V 3 CP

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

Capacity 12 V

See page 335 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the steeringcolumn.

45 AH/20 HR12 V

26 psi (180 kPa , 1.8 kgf/cm )26 psi (180 kPa , 1.8 kgf/cm )

P205/70R15 95SSizePressure

Toe-in

Camber

Caster 1°45’1°

0°0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0.0 in (0 mm)

See page 336 or the fuse boxcover.

Interior

Under-hoodHeadlightsFront turn signal/side markerlightsParking lightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightCeiling lightSpotlightsCargo area LightRear side marker lightsHigh-mount brake light

FrontRearFrontRearFront

Front/RearFrontRear

(H4/HB2)

－The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thesegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)


－ Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Temperature A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)


Some conventional gasolines arebeing blended with alcohol or anether compound. These gasolinesare collectively referred to asoxygenated fuels. To meet clean airstandards, some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada use oxygenatedfuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, besure it is unleaded and meets theminimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, tryto confirm the fuel’s contents. Somestates/provinces require thisinformation to be posted on thepump.

The following are the U.S. EPA andCanadian CGSB approvedpercentages of oxygenates:

(methyl or woodalcohol)Your vehicle was not designed to usefuel that contains methanol.Methanol can corrode metal parts inthe fuel system, and also damageplastic and rubber components. Thisdamage would not be covered byyour warranties.

(Methyl Tertiary ButylEther)You may use gasoline containing upto 15 percent MTBE by volume.

(ethyl or grain alcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 10 percent ethanol by volume.Gasoline containing ethanol may bemarketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performanceproblems resulting from the use ofan oxygenated fuel containing morethan the percentages of oxygenatesgiven above are not covered underwarranty.

METHANOL

MTBE

ETHANOL

Oxygenated Fuels


If you are planning to take yourHonda outside the U.S. or Canada,contact the tourist bureaus in theareas you will be traveling in to findout about the availability of unleadedgasoline with the proper octanerating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,be aware that using leaded gasolinein your Honda will affect perfor-mance and fuel mileage, and damageits emissions controls. It will nolonger comply with U.S. andCanadian emissions regulations, andwill be illegal to operate in NorthAmerica. To bring your vehicle backinto compliance will require the re-placement of several components,such as the oxygen sensors and thethree way catalytic converter. Thesereplacements are not covered underwarranty.

Driving in Foreign Countries


＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards (CMVSS) forEmissions valid at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a PositiveCrankcase Ventilation System. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The Positive Crank-case Ventilation valve routes them

from the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

238

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls


The exhaust emissions controlsinclude three systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control and ThreeWay Catalytic Converter. Thesethree systems work together tocontrol the engine’s combustion andminimize the amount of HC, CO, andNOx that comes out the tailpipe. Theexhaust emissions control systemsare separate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems. The emissions control systems are

covered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newgenuine Honda replacement parts ortheir equivalent for repairs. Usinglower quality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Engine Control Module (ECM)or the Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under all operat-ing conditions.

2

2

Replacement PartsExhaust Emissions Controls PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls


The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your vehicle away from highgrass, dry leaves, or other flamma-bles.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter


TTHHRREEEE WWAAYY CCAATTAALLYYTTIICC CCOONNVVEERRTTEERR

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle re-tested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for re-testingby doing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (approximately 3minutes).

CONTINUED

State Emissions Testing

Technical Information

Testing of Readiness Codes

351

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour Honda dealer.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not usethe cruise control. When trafficallows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

State Emissions Testing


Customer Relations................................Information . 354

....................Warranty Coverages . 355Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 356.....................Authorized Manuals . 357

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty and Customer Relations 353

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Relations Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

340

Warranty and Customer Relations

Customer Relations Information

354

CUSTOMER RELATIONSRELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 250-4318American Honda Motor Co.Honda Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7D1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

Your new Honda is covered by thesewarranties:

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from a Honda dealer.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’s emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

covers all genuineHonda replacement parts againstdefects in materials and workman-ship.

Genuine Honda Accessories arecovered under this warranty. Timeand mileage limits depend on thetype of accessory and other factors.Please read your warranty manualfor details.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2002 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your Honda’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warranty infor-mation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2002 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Warranty Coverages

Warranty and Customer Relations 355

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

Warranty and Customer Relations356

＊

＊

＊

－

＊２００２

ＨＯＮ

The following publications covering the operation andservicing of your vehicle can be obtained from HelmIncorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone numberon the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Honda dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

357

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Publication

Form Number

61S9A00

61S9A00EL

61S9A30

31S9A600

HON-R

Form Description

2002 Honda CR-V

Service Manual

2002 Honda CR-V

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2002 Honda CR-V

Body Repair Manual

2002 Honda CR-V

Owner’s Manual

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Price

Each

$68.00

$48.00

$42.00

$32.00

FREE

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.00

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurringobligation.

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

358

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

CONTINUED

...Accessories and Modifications . 191................................Accessories . 191

.Additional Safety Precautions . 192............................Modifications . 192

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key.......................................Position) . 87

............Accessory Power Sockets . 122....................Additives, Engine Oil . 248

.............................Airbag (SRS) . 10, 54.....................Air Cleaner Element . 265

..............Air Conditioning System . 128..............................Maintenance . 274

.........................................Usage . 128.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 130.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 278

..................High Speed Driving . 279.........................Normal Driving . 279.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 346

......................................Antifreeze . 251Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 68, 214...................................Operation . 212

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 178

Anti-theft Steering Column..............................................Lock . 87

..........................Appearance Care . 297................................Audio System . 137

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 52.............Automatic Speed Control . 179..............Automatic Transmission . 204

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 342...............Checking Fluid Level . 260

.......................................Shifting . 205.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 204

................Shift Lever Positions . 205....................Shift Lock Release . 209

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 66, 326............................Jump Starting . 320

..............................Maintenance . 269............................Specifications . 343

..............................Before Driving . 183....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 50

.........................Beverage Holders . 116.................................Body Repairs . 305

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 212

.............Break-in, New Linings . 184....................Bulb Replacement . 290

...........................................Fluid . 263.........................................Parking . 82

.................System Indicator . 66, 329........................Wear Indicators . 211

.............................Braking System . 211.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 184

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 77........................Brights, Headlights . 76

.................................Built-in Table . 117Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 290..............................Brake Lights . 290

......................Cargo Area Light . 293..............................Ceiling Light . 293

................Front Parking Lights . 289........Front Side Marker Lights . 288

.................................Headlights . 287.........High-mount Brake Light . 292

...........................Interior Lights . 293...................License Plate Light . 291

Index

A

B

I

＊Bulb Replacement.........Rear Side Marker Lights . 290

............................Specifications . 343...................................Spotlights . 293

....................Turn Signal Lights . 288..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 287

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii.......................................Dashboard . 64

................Daytime Running Lights . 77............Defects, Reporting Safety . 356

........................Defog and Defrost . 134................Defogger, Rear Window . 81..............Defrosting the Windows . 134

.......................Detachable Anchor . 108....................................Dimensions . 342

...............Dimming the Headlights . 76

............................Capacities Chart . 342.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 60

..........................Cargo Area Light . 125.................................Cargo Hooks . 195

.............................Carrying Cargo . 193Cassette Player

............................................Care . 168...........................Operation . 151, 164

..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii..........................CD Changer . 149, 169

.......................................CD Player . 146...............................Center Pocket . 119

..................................Center Table . 115........................Certification Label . 340

............................................Chains . 284....................Changing a Flat Tire . 308

............Changing Engine Coolant . 253

.................................Changing Oil . 249........................................How to . 249......................................When to . 238

...Charging System Indicator . 66, 326............Checklist, Before Driving . 199

.....................................Child Safety . 24.......................................Child Seats . 29

......LATCH Anchorage System . 48...........................Lower Anchors . 48

............Tether Anchorage Point . 46..................Childproof Door Locks . 93

....................Cleaner Element, Air . 265Cleaning

....................Aluminum Wheels . 299...................................Carpeting . 301

......................................Exterior . 298.........................................Fabric . 302.......................................Interior . 301.......................................Leather . 302

...................................Seat Belts . 302...........................................Vinyl . 302

....................................Windows . 303.................Clock, Setting the . 144, 162

...................................Clutch Fluid . 264........................CO in the Exhaust . 348

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 201

...............Consumer Information . 354.............Controls, Instruments and . 63

Coolant........................................Adding . 251

....................................Checking . 189.........................Proper Solution . 251

...................................Replacing . 253...................Temperature Gauge . 74

....................Corrosion Protection . 304Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 348............Cruise Control Operation . 179..........Customer Relations Office . 354

Index

C

D

II

CONTINUED

..............................Economy, Fuel . 190............Emergencies on the Road . 307.............Battery, Jump Starting . 320...........Brake System Indicator . 329

................Changing a Flat Tire . 308.....Charging System Indicator . 326

..................Checking the Fuses . 332.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 325...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 327...Manually Closing Moonroof . 330

..................Overheated Engine . 323...........................Emergency Brake . 82

......................Emergency Flashers . 81......................Emergency Towing . 337.......................Emissions Controls . 348

.............Emissions Testing, State . 351Engine

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 74...................................Drive Belt . 277

......Engine Speed Limiter . 203, 208Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 66, 327........Oil Pressure Indicator . 66, 325..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 247

...............................Overheating . 323............................Specifications . 342

.......................................Starting . 200......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 346

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 348...............................Exhaust Fumes . 60

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 21

..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 298

............................Fabric, Cleaning . 302...................................Fan, Interior . 128

Features, Comfort and..............................Convenience . 127

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 185Filters

................................Air Cleaner . 265.........................Dust and Pollen . 275

...............................................Oil . 2495-speed Manual Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 261................................Shifting the . 202

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 81...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 308

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 260

..................................Engine Oil . 188..........................Directional Signals . 77

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 211.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 250

Doors..............Locking and Unlocking . 88

......................Power Door Locks . 88..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 344

Downshifting, 5-speed Manual.............................Transmission . 202

.......................................Drive Belt . 277...........................................Driving . 197

....................................Economy . 190.........................In Bad Weather . 215

................In Foreign Countries . 347........................Driving Guidelines . 198

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 275

Index

E

F

III

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 260

..........................................Brake . 263.........................................Clutch . 264

..............Manual Transmission . 261..........................Power Steering . 264

.......................Rear Differential . 262..................Windshield Washer . 258

FM Stereo Radio...................................Reception . 161

.........................Folding Rear Seat . 104.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 347

..........................Four-way Flashers . 81............................Front Airbags . 10, 54

.................................................Fuel . 184......................Fill Door and Cap . 185

...........................................Gauge . 74................Octane Requirement . 184

...............................Oxygenated . 346........................Reserve Indicator . 69

........................Tank, Filling the . 185.....................Fuses, Checking the . 331

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 190

..........................................Gasohol . 346.........................................Gasoline . 184

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 69...........................................Gauge . 74

................Octane Requirement . 184........................Tank, Filling the . 185

................Gas Station Procedures . 185Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 74...............................................Fuel . 74

...............................Speedometer . 72.................................Tachometer . 72

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 204

5-speed Manual.........................Transmission . 203

..............................Glass Cleaning . 303........................................Glove Box . 96

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 287.....................................Hatch Glass . 94

..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 81Headlights

........................................Aiming . 287

............Daytime Running Lights . 77..................High Beam Indicator . 69

........................Reminder Beeper . 76........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 287

...................................Turning on . 76..............................Head Restraints . 99

.....................Heating and Cooling . 128.............High Altitude, Starting at . 201

.................High-Low Beam Switch . 76..............High-mount Brake Light . 292

....................................Hood Latch . 266.......................Hood, Opening the . 186

..............................................Horn . 3, 75...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 264

.................................Hydroplaning . 216

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 340Ignition

..............................................Keys . 84...........................................Switch . 86

............Timing Control System . 349........................Immobilizer System . 85

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 65

Index

G

H

I

IV

CONTINUED

.......................Label, Certification . 340.................Lane Change, Signaling . 77

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 17, 50...........LATCH Anchorage System . 48

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 287

.......................................Indicator . 65.........................................Parking . 76

..................................Turn Signal . 77.....................................Load Limit . 194

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 87Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 87............................Fuel Fill Door . 185

....................................Glove Box . 96.................................Power Door . 88

........................................Tailgate . 93........................Low Coolant Level . 189.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 69

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 66, 325................................Lower Anchors . 48

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 342.........................................Luggage . 193

..................................Maintenance . 233...Owner Maintenance Checks . 245

.................................Record . 243-244......................Required Indicator . 70

..........................................Safety . 234.............................Schedule . 238-242

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 66, 327...................Manual Transmission . 202

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 261.........................Meters, Gauges . 65, 72

...................Methanol in Gasoline . 346........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 114

.......................................Moonroof . 113......................Closing Manually . 330

...................................Operation . 113

...............................Infant Restraint . 34......................................Infant Seats . 34

......LATCH Anchorage System . 48...........................Lower Anchors . 48

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 278.................High Speed Driving . 279

.........................Normal Driving . 279.................................Inside Mirror . 114

.............................Inspection, Tire . 280............................Instrument Panel . 65

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 77...........................Interior Cleaning . 301

...............................Interior Lights . 124........................................Introduction . i

..................................................Keys . 84

..................Jacking up the vehicle . 312.......................................Jack, Tire . 309

................................Jump Starting . 320

Index

L M

K

J

V

...................Neutral Gear Position . 206..................New Vehicle Break-in . 184

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 203...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 340

...................Radiator Overheating . 323Radio/Cassette/CD Sound

........................................System . 137...........................Readiness Codes . 328

.................Rear Differential Fluid . 262..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 290

........................Rear Seat, Folding . 104..........................Rear View Mirror . 114

.................Rear Window Defogger . 81.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 80

...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 97.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 203

.............................Reminder Lights . 65.......................Remote Transmitter . 89

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 184.........................................Odometer . 73

...............................Odometer, Trip . 73..............Off-Highway Guidelines . 226

Oil........................Change, How to . 249......................Change, When to . 238......................Checking Engine . 188..............Pressure Indicator . 66, 325

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 248

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 87Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 348..Operation in Foreign Countries . 347

............................Outside Mirrors . 114

....Outside Temperature Indicator . 73.....................................Over Drive . 207

....................Overheating, Engine . 323.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 245

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 346

..............................Paint Touch-up . 300..............Panel Brightness Control . 77

........................Park Gear Position . 205...........................................Parking . 210

.................................Parking Brake . 82Parking Brake and Brake

.................System Indicator . 66, 329.................................Parking Lights . 76

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 210.............................PGM-FI System . 349

..................Polishing and Waxing . 299............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 21............................Protecting Adults . 13

...Additional Safety Precautions . 22.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 21

........................Protecting Children . 24.......................Protecting Infants . 34

.......Protecting Larger Children . 42.........Protecting Small Children . 38

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 46

.............................Using LATCH . 48

Index

N

O

RP

VI

＊

＊

CONTINUED

Replacement Information.................Air Cleaner Element . 265

..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 275..........................Engine Coolant . 253

................Engine Oil and Filter . 249..........................................Fuses . 331

................................Light Bulbs . 287....................................Schedule . 238

................................Spark Plugs . 267...........................................Tires . 282

.............................Wiper Blades . 271Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 53Reserve Tank, Engine

...............................Coolant . 189, 251...............................Restraint, Child . 24

..................Reverse Gear Position . 206...........................Reverse Lockout . 209

................................Rotation, Tire . 281

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 50.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 356...........Safety Checklist, Pre-Drive . 12

.................................Safety Features . 7.........................................Airbags . 10

..................................Door Locks . 11..........................Head Restraints . 11

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 61...............................Safety Messages . ii

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 50...............Additional Information . 50

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 21Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 52.....................................Cleaning . 302

...................Detachable Anchor . 108................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17, 50

................................Maintenance . 53Reminder Light and

................................Beeper . 50, 67................................Replacement . 53

...................System Components . 50...............Use During Pregnancy . 21

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17..................................Seat Heaters . 109

........................Seats, Adjusting the . 97...............................Serial Number . 340

...........................Service Intervals . 238

...........................Service Manual . 357.........Service Station Procedures . 185

..................Setting the Clock . 144, 162.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 204

........................Shift Lock Release . 209..............................Side Airbags . 10, 56

....................Cutoff Indicator . 58, 67Side Marker Lights, Bulb

..............................Replacement . 288...............................Signaling Turns . 77

.....................................Snow Tires . 283...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 298

................................Sound System . 137......................................Spare Tire . 308

................Spark Plugs, Replacing . 267....................Specifications Charts . 342

................................Speed Control . 179...................................Speedometer . 72

.......................................Spotlights . 124

Index

S

VII

.....................................Tachometer . 72Tailgate

.................................Hatch Glass . 94............................Open Indicator . 70

.................................Opening the . 93..........Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 290

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 307...........................Tape Player . 151, 164

Technical Descriptions......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 344.....Emissions Control Systems . 348

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 346Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 350.......................Temperature Gauge . 74

..............Tether Anchorage Points . 46............................Theft Protection . 178

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 350..................Time, Setting the . 144, 162

....................................Tire Chains . 284.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 308

...............................................Tires . 278..............................Air Pressure . 279

.........................Checking Wear . 280......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 344

......................................Inflation . 278..................................Inspection . 280

..............................Maintenance . 280...................................Replacing . 282

......................................Rotating . 281...........................................Snow . 283

............................Specifications . 343................................Tire Chains . 284

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 308Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 217...............Behind a Motorhome . 224

................................Emergency . 337

..........SRS, Additional Information . 54...Additional Safety Precautions . 59

.............................Airbag Service . 59How the Side Airbag Cutoff

...........Indicator Light Works . 58..How the SRS Indicator Works . 57

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 54

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 56........................SRS Components . 54

.............................SRS Indicator . 57, 67....START (Ignition Key Position) . 87

..............State Emissions Testing . 351.......................Starting the Engine . 200

In Cold Weather at High..................................Altitude . 201

................With a Dead Battery . 320........Steam Coming from Engine . 323

Steering Wheel..................................Adjustment . 83

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 87...................Stereo Sound System . 137

...................................Storage Box . 119....................Storing Your Vehicle . 295

........................Sunglasses Holder . 121

Supplemental Restraint................................System . 10, 54......................................Servicing . 59

.........................SRS Indicator . 57, 67...................System Components . 54

..................................Synthetic Oil . 248

Index

T

VIII

＊

＊

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

..............................Automatic . 260Checking Fluid Level,

...................................Manual . 261..................Fluid Selection . 260, 261

..............Identification Number . 341.............Shifting the Automatic . 204

..................Shifting the Manual . 202.....................................Treadwear . 344.......................................Trip Meter . 73

....................................Turn Signals . 77

.....................Underside, Cleaning . 304Unexpected, Taking Care

..........................................of the . 307....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 344

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 184.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 301

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 250

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 194......................Vehicle Dimensions . 342

....Vehicle Identification Number . 340.............................Vehicle Storage . 295

.....................................Ventilation . 131.................................................VIN . 340

...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 302..................................Viscosity, Oil . 248

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 61

..................Warranty Coverages . 355Washers, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 258.....................................Operation . 79

.........................................Washing . 298..................Waxing and Polishing . 299

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 83............Alignment and Balance . 280

......................................Wrench . 311

Windows.....................................Cleaning . 303

................Operating the Power . 110...........................Rear, Defogger . 81

Windshield.......................................Cleaning . 78...................................Defroster . 134

.....................................Washers . 258Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 271.....................................Operation . 78

....................................Worn Tires . 280.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 337

: U.S. and Canada only

Index

U

V

W

IX

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

5-speed Manual TransmissionFluid:

Rear Differential Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

15.3 US gal (58 , 12.8 Imp gal)

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 86 or higher. Honda Manual Transmission

Fluid preferred, or an API serviceSG, SH or SJ, SAE 10W-30 or10W-40 motor oil as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Capacity (including differential): 26 psi (180 kPa , 1.8 kgf/cm )

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Front/Rear:

2.0 US qt (1.9 , 1.7 Imp qt)API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4.4 US qt (4.2 , 3.7 Imp qt)

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Honda Dual Pump Fluid. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Capacity:1.1 US qt (1.0 , 0.9 Imp qt)

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

247

261

262

264

263

260

Documents

2002 CR-V Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/ACR0202OM/enu/CR0202OM.pdf2002 CR-V Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and